BenchMark Ultra Advanced Staining Operator Guide PDF

BenchMark ULTRA
Advanced Staining System

Operator Guide
Ventana Medical Systems, Inc.

www.ventana.com
Part No.: 750-600

November 2012, 24814EN Rev E
BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Copyright © 2012. Ventana Medical Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
BENCHMARK, NEXES, DISCOVERY, SLS, VENTANA, and the VENTANA logo are trademarks of Roche.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The Ventana System Software (VSS) 12.1 is protected by contract law, copyright laws, and international treaties.
The Ventana System Software (VSS) 12.1 is licensed for use between Ventana Medical Systems, Inc.and a licensee, and only users authorized
there under are permitted to access and use the software. Unauthorized use and distribution may result in civil and criminal penalties.
Warranty
Ventana warrants and represents that when used per instructions, the Products will perform in accordance with the relevant Product specification
for a period of 12 months from the date of delivery or installation of system or instrument. Reagents are warranted until their respective expiry
dates. Ventana reserves the right to change the design or specifications of the Products at any time. Ventana will provide Customer prior notice
of any change in design or specification that materially affects Product performance. Ventana further warrants that the Products do not infringe
the patent rights of third parties. In the event of a court order of patent infringement results in an interruption in the Customer's continued use of
the Products, Ventana shall, at its option, either (a) ) provide for the Customer at Ventana's expense the right to continue using the affected
products; or (b) ) modify or replace the affected products so that the products become non-infringing, but only if the modification or replacement
does not negatively affect the performance of the products or their use by the Customer. THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES. VENTANA DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE., Ventana will have no liability for any claim of infringement to
the extent that it is based on materials or modifications made by Customer or a third party at the request of Customer. This Section 4 states the
entire liability of Ventana and the exclusive remedy of Customer with respect to any alleged infringement. Ventana's warranty obligations are
contingent upon Customer: (i) ) notifying Ventana of a warranty claim within ten (10) days after having knowledge of same; (ii) ) providing
sufficient detail of the facts associated with a warranty claim in writing so as to allow Ventana to reasonably reproduce any alleged defects in the
Products, or demonstrate to Ventana such defect.
Revision History
Manual Version Revision date Changes
12.1 November 2012 Updated instructions for cleaning waste tub and drain.
Regulatory Notices, removed reference to clinical or research in Intended Purpose section.
Chapter 7, clarified that after a staining run completes, slide specific information is listed
on the Run Report or Case Report.
Contact
Ventana Medical Systems, Inc.

a Member of the Roche Group
1910 Innovation Park Drive
Tucson, AZ 85755
USA
+1 520 887-2155
+1 800 227-2155 (USA)
www.ventana.com
Roche Diagnostics GmbH

Sandhofer Strasse 116
D-68305 Mannheim
Germany
ii BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System

Contents
List of Figures ........................................................................................... xvii

Regulatory Notices .....................................................................................xxv
Compliance with Standards ..................................................................................... xxv
Intended Use ........................................................................................................... xxvi
Intended Purpose .................................................................................................... xxvi
FCC Information ...................................................................................................... xxvi
Canadian DOC Information ..................................................................................... xxvi
Specifications ......................................................................................................... xxvii
Disposal at End of Useful Life ................................................................................xxviii
Chapter 1. Welcome .......................................................................................1

Description .................................................................................................................. 1
System Capabilities ..................................................................................................... 2
Staining Capabilities ............................................................................................... 2
Operating Capabilities ............................................................................................ 2
Staining Management ................................................................................................. 2
IHC ......................................................................................................................... 2
ISH .......................................................................................................................... 2
Dual Stains ............................................................................................................. 2
Integration into Your Workflow .................................................................................... 2
Connectivity ............................................................................................................ 2
Vantage Compatibility ............................................................................................. 3
Chapter 2. Warnings and Precautions ............................................................5

Safety Compliance ...................................................................................................... 5
Avoiding Injury ............................................................................................................. 5
Biological and Chemical Hazards ........................................................................... 5
Spills ....................................................................................................................... 5
Cleaning and Maintenance ..................................................................................... 6
Instrument Location ................................................................................................ 6
Safety Training ....................................................................................................... 6
24814EN Rev E iii

Contents BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Electrical Hazards .................................................................................................. 6

Stainer Subassembly Operation ............................................................................. 7
Symbols ...................................................................................................................... 8
Chapter 3. The BenchMark ULTRA System .............................................. 11

Theory and Principles of Instrument Operation ......................................................... 11
System Components ................................................................................................. 11
Staining Instrument .............................................................................................. 11
Computer .............................................................................................................. 11
Product Registration Probe .................................................................................. 12
Label and Report Printers .................................................................................... 12
USB Flash Disk .................................................................................................... 12
Products ............................................................................................................... 12
How the System Works ............................................................................................. 13
Starting a Staining Run ........................................................................................ 13
Monitoring a Run .................................................................................................. 13
Continuous Access Processing ............................................................................ 13
Bulk Fluids and Waste ..................................................................................... 13
Ultimate Reagent Access Feature ................................................................... 14
Staining Slides ...................................................................................................... 14
The BenchMark ULTRA Instrument .......................................................................... 14
Reagent Hood ...................................................................................................... 14
Reagent Carousel ................................................................................................ 14
Slide Drawers ....................................................................................................... 15
Instrument Status Panel ....................................................................................... 15
Bulk Reagents ...................................................................................................... 15
Waste Containers ................................................................................................. 15
The Ventana System Software ................................................................................. 16
System Information and Software Version Control ................................................... 16
Global Navigation ................................................................................................. 16
Instrument Bar ...................................................................................................... 16
Communicator ...................................................................................................... 16
Home View ........................................................................................................... 17
Instrument View .................................................................................................... 17
Reagent and Slide Histograms ............................................................................. 19
Inventory and Orders ............................................................................................ 20
Steps to Staining Slides ............................................................................................ 20
Chapter 4. Perform a Staining Run .............................................................. 21

Start Up ..................................................................................................................... 21
Refill Bulk Bottles ...................................................................................................... 21
Remove or Replace a Bulk Bottle ........................................................................ 21
Empty Waste Containers .......................................................................................... 21
Create Labels ............................................................................................................ 22
Apply Slide Labels ..................................................................................................... 23
Print a Pick List of Required Reagents ..................................................................... 24
Install a Reagent Tray ............................................................................................... 25
iv Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide Contents
Load Slides ............................................................................................................... 25

Start the Staining Run ............................................................................................... 26
Unload Completed Slides .......................................................................................... 26
Rinse Slides and Apply Coverslips ........................................................................... 26
Chapter 5. Start and Stop the System ...........................................................27

About Starting and Stopping ..................................................................................... 27
Start the Ventana System Software ........................................................................ 27
Start an Instrument .................................................................................................... 28
Startup Modes ...................................................................................................... 29
Stop an Instrument .................................................................................................... 29
Shut Down the Software and Computer .................................................................... 30
Chapter 6. Operate the Staining Instrument .................................................31

Instrument Parts ........................................................................................................ 31
Connect and Define Instruments ............................................................................... 32
Monitor Instrument Status ......................................................................................... 33
Instrument Status Panel ....................................................................................... 33
Software Status Indicators .................................................................................... 33
About Startup Modes ................................................................................................ 34
Sleep Mode .......................................................................................................... 34
Ready Mode ......................................................................................................... 34
Running Mode ...................................................................................................... 34
Processing Slides ............................................................................................ 34
Adding Slides While Running .......................................................................... 35
When Slides Are Finished ............................................................................... 35
Start and Stop an Instrument .................................................................................... 36
Start an Instrument .............................................................................................. 36
Stop an Instrument ............................................................................................... 36
Open the Reagent Hood ........................................................................................... 36
Operate Slide Drawers .............................................................................................. 37
On the Instrument ................................................................................................. 37
Single Drawers ................................................................................................ 37
Groups of Drawers ........................................................................................... 37
On the Computer .................................................................................................. 37
Selected Drawers ............................................................................................ 37
Groups of Drawers ........................................................................................... 38
Add Slides While Slides Are Running ....................................................................... 38
Add a Single Slide ................................................................................................ 38
Add a Group of Slides .......................................................................................... 38
Cancel Slides ............................................................................................................ 39
Find a Slide on an Instrument ................................................................................... 39
Reagent Access Points ............................................................................................. 39
About Reagent Access Points .............................................................................. 39
When a Reagent Access Point is Reached .......................................................... 40
View Status of Reagent Access Points ................................................................ 40
24814EN Rev E v
Reagent Access and Reagent Qualification ......................................................... 40

Schedule Reagent Access Points From the Instrument View .............................. 41
Select a Reagent Access Time ....................................................................... 41
View the Selected Reagent Access Time and the Reagent Pick List .............. 42
Schedule Reagent Access Points From Slide and Reagent Histogram Views .... 42
About Histogram Blue Bands ...................................................................... 43
Histogram Reagent Access Buttons ................................................................ 44
Select Reagent Access Point in a Histogram .................................................. 44
Information and Error Messages .......................................................................... 44
Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 45
Maintenance Check List ....................................................................................... 45
Daily Maintenance ................................................................................................ 45
Wipe External Surfaces ................................................................................... 45
Pre-Run Check List .......................................................................................... 45
Clean Slide Drawers ........................................................................................ 45
Monthly and Quarterly Maintenance .................................................................... 46
Chapter 7. Manage Slide Orders ................................................................. 47

About the Order List .................................................................................................. 47
Order List .............................................................................................................. 47
Orders Sent from an LIS ...................................................................................... 48
How Orders Are Organized .................................................................................. 48
Organize the Order List ............................................................................................. 49
Column Options .................................................................................................... 49
Move or Resize Columns ..................................................................................... 49
Sort Column Up or Down ..................................................................................... 50
Return to Default Settings .................................................................................... 50
Custom Filters ...................................................................................................... 50
Order Maintenance ............................................................................................... 51
Find Orders ............................................................................................................... 51
Find Orders by Requester .................................................................................... 51
Sort Orders by Printed Labels .............................................................................. 51
Sort Orders by Slide ID ........................................................................................ 51
Sort Orders by Status and Protocol ...................................................................... 51
Group Orders by Label ......................................................................................... 52
Print Orders ............................................................................................................... 52
Find Slides on the Instrument ................................................................................... 52
View Order Details .................................................................................................... 53
Create a New Order .................................................................................................. 53
Change Order Information ....................................................................................... 54
Create Multiple Orders .............................................................................................. 54
Order List View ..................................................................................................... 55
Order Details View ............................................................................................... 55
Select Protocol View ............................................................................................ 56
Create Multiple New Orders for a Patient ............................................................. 57
Re-create an Order .............................................................................................. 58
Edit an Order ........................................................................................................ 58
vi Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Delete an Order ......................................................................................................... 58

Print Reports and Labels ........................................................................................... 59
Print an Order Report ........................................................................................... 59
Print or Reprint Slide Labels ................................................................................. 59
Print a Reagent Pick List ...................................................................................... 60
Chapter 8. Create Staining Protocols ...........................................................61

About Staining Protocols ........................................................................................... 61
Instrument Protocols Option ...................................................................................... 61
Search, View, and Print Features in the Protocol Editor ........................................... 62
Selectable Protocol Options ................................................................................. 63
Protocol Views ...................................................................................................... 63
To use the pop-up selection window ............................................................. 64
To use the sidebar view instead of the pop up window ................................... 65
How to Search Protocol Steps by Keyword .......................................................... 66
How to Print from the Protocol Editor ................................................................... 66
How to Use the Zoom Feature ............................................................................. 67
How to Scroll with the Mouse Wheel .................................................................... 67
Create and Print a Protocol ....................................................................................... 68
Modify a Protocol ...................................................................................................... 69
Delete a Protocol ....................................................................................................... 70
View Protocol Definitions .......................................................................................... 70
Print Protocol Steps and Details ............................................................................... 70
Print a Protocol Usage Report .................................................................................. 71
Chapter 9. Generate Slide Labels .................................................................73

About Slide Labels .................................................................................................... 73
Label Handling .......................................................................................................... 74
Create a Slide Label .................................................................................................. 74
Create a Batch of Slide Labels .................................................................................. 76
Print a Batch of Slide Labels ..................................................................................... 76
Remove a Label from the Print List ........................................................................... 76
Cancel Slide Label Printing ....................................................................................... 77
Apply a Slide Label ................................................................................................... 77
Reprint Slide Labels .................................................................................................. 78
Print Labels from the Order List ................................................................................ 79
Print Labels from the Order Details Panel ................................................................. 79
Change Label Information ......................................................................................... 79
Change Case Protocol Selection .......................................................................... 79
Chapter 10. Work with Slides ......................................................................81

About Slides .............................................................................................................. 81
Load and Remove Slides .......................................................................................... 81
Load a Slide into a Drawer ................................................................................... 81
Remove a Slide from a Drawer ............................................................................ 81
24814EN Rev E vii

Cancel a Slide ...................................................................................................... 82

Monitor Slides ........................................................................................................... 82
Instrument Bar Status ........................................................................................... 82
Slide Details ......................................................................................................... 83
Slide Processing Time .......................................................................................... 85
Find Slides on an Instrument .................................................................................... 86
Create Slide Reports ................................................................................................. 87
Print Run Reports ................................................................................................. 87
Protocol Steps in the Stopped Run Report .......................................................... 88
Edit Slide Data ...................................................................................................... 89
Design a New Case Report .................................................................................. 89
Print a Case Report .............................................................................................. 90
Delete a Case Report ........................................................................................... 90
Modify a Case Report ........................................................................................... 91
Consolidated Run Reports ................................................................................... 91
Print Consolidated Run Reports ........................................................................... 91
Chapter 11. Manage Reagents ..................................................................... 93

About Reagents ........................................................................................................ 93
Status Indicators ................................................................................................... 93
Dispensers ........................................................................................................... 93
Duplicate Products ............................................................................................... 93
Pick Lists .............................................................................................................. 93
Manage Reagents with Ultimate Reagent Access ............................................... 94
About Ultimate Reagent Access Hardware .................................................... 94
Set User Privileges for Ultimate Reagent Access ............................................ 95
Set Pre-Reagent Access Alarm Warning ......................................................... 95
When a Reagent Access Point is Reached ..................................................... 95
Load a Dispenser onto a Tray .................................................................................. 96
Install and Remove Trays ......................................................................................... 97
Install a Tray ......................................................................................................... 97
Remove a Tray ..................................................................................................... 97
Monitor Reagents ...................................................................................................... 98
Check Reagent Status ......................................................................................... 98
View Details in Instrument View ........................................................................... 98
View Details in the Histogram .............................................................................. 99
View and Print the Reagent Grid ............................................................................. 100
Sorting Reagent Grid Columns .......................................................................... 102
View a Reagent Access Pick List ............................................................................ 102
View Last Reagents ................................................................................................ 103
View Last Reagents in the Histogram ................................................................ 103
View Last Reagents in a Run Report ................................................................. 103
Register a VENTANA Reagent ............................................................................... 103
Register a Non-Ventana Reagent ........................................................................... 104
Manage Reagent Inventory ..................................................................................... 104
viii Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Chapter 12. Titrating ..................................................................................105

About Titration ......................................................................................................... 105
Create a Titration Protocol ...................................................................................... 106
Run Titration Slides ................................................................................................. 107
Manual Applications List ......................................................................................... 108
Apply Reagent to a Slide ......................................................................................... 109
Unload Titration Slides ............................................................................................ 109
Print a Run Report .................................................................................................. 109
Chapter 13. Prepare Bulk Products ............................................................111

About Bulk Products ................................................................................................ 111
Remove or Replace a Bulk Bottle ........................................................................... 111
Prepare Bulk Reagents ........................................................................................... 111
Position 1: EZ Prep ............................................................................................. 111
Position 2: ULTRA Liquid Coverslip ................................................................... 112
Position 3: SSC .................................................................................................. 112
Position 4: Reaction Buffer ................................................................................. 112
Position 5: ULTRA CC1 ...................................................................................... 113
Position 6: ULTRA CC2 ...................................................................................... 113
Position 7: Optional ............................................................................................ 113
Manage Waste Containers ...................................................................................... 113
Monitor Waste Containers .................................................................................. 113
Set Waste Container Levels ............................................................................... 114
Empty and Replace a Waste Container ............................................................. 115
Install a Carboy Spigot ....................................................................................... 115
Chapter 14. Quality Control .......................................................................117

About Control Slides ............................................................................................... 117
Managing Blocks and Control Slides ...................................................................... 117
Record Control Block Information ....................................................................... 118
Log Control Slides .............................................................................................. 119
View Control Block Information .......................................................................... 120
View a Series of Control Slides .......................................................................... 120
Deactivate a Control Block ................................................................................. 120
Deactivate a Series of Control Slides ................................................................. 121
Enter a Request for Control Slides ..................................................................... 121
View Control Slide Requests .............................................................................. 122
Deactivate a Requester Record ......................................................................... 122
Deactivate Control Slide Requests ..................................................................... 122
Enter Control Results .............................................................................................. 123
Select a Staining Run ......................................................................................... 123
Enter and Print Results ....................................................................................... 123
Quality Control Reports ........................................................................................... 125
Print a Quality Control Report ............................................................................. 125
24814EN Rev E ix
Chapter 15. Reports ................................................................................... 127

Case Report ............................................................................................................ 127
Contact Reports ...................................................................................................... 127
Contact List ........................................................................................................ 128
Contact Form ...................................................................................................... 128
Daily Maintenance Log ............................................................................................ 128
Inventory Reports .................................................................................................... 129
Inventory Report ................................................................................................. 129
Inventory Product Usage .................................................................................... 129
Inventory Detail Usage Report for Dispensers .................................................. 130
Inventory Detail Usage Report for Vials ............................................................ 130
Inventory Detail Usage Report for Bulks ........................................................... 131
Reagent Access Point Pick List .............................................................................. 132
Manual Application List ........................................................................................... 132
Order List Reports ................................................................................................... 132
Order Grid .......................................................................................................... 132
Pick List for Selected Orders .............................................................................. 133
Protocol Reports ..................................................................................................... 133
Protocol Report .................................................................................................. 133
Protocol Summary Report .................................................................................. 133
Protocol Usage Report ....................................................................................... 134
Quality Control Reports ........................................................................................... 134
Case Control Report ........................................................................................... 134
Antibody QC Report ........................................................................................... 134
Probe QC Report ................................................................................................ 135
Dispensed Reagent QC Report .......................................................................... 135
Kit QC Report ..................................................................................................... 135
Bulk QC Report .................................................................................................. 136
Control Block QC Report .................................................................................... 136
Slide Series QC Report ...................................................................................... 136
Staining Run Reports .............................................................................................. 137
Run Report Messages and Reagent Access ..................................................... 137
Completed Staining Run Report ......................................................................... 138
Stopped Staining Run Report ............................................................................. 138
Consolidated Completed Staining Run Report .................................................. 139
Print Preview ........................................................................................................... 140
Chapter 16. Label Printer .......................................................................... 141

About the Printer ..................................................................................................... 141
Set Up the Printer .................................................................................................... 141
Load a Label Roll .................................................................................................... 142
Load a Ribbon ......................................................................................................... 143
Update SLS for New Label Roll or Ribbon .............................................................. 143
Clean the Printer ..................................................................................................... 144
x Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Chapter 17. Messages and Errors ...............................................................145

About the Communicator ........................................................................................ 145
Manage Messages .................................................................................................. 146
Sign off on a Critical Error .................................................................................. 146
Add Comments for a Critical Error ...................................................................... 146
If a Fatal Error Occurs ........................................................................................ 146
Message Classes ................................................................................................... 147
HASP Key .......................................................................................................... 148
Product Registration .......................................................................................... 149
Communication with the Instrument .................................................................. 150
Serial Numbers .................................................................................................. 152
Software Application .......................................................................................... 153
Run Compilation ................................................................................................ 156
Database ........................................................................................................... 167
Database Access ............................................................................................... 170
Reagent Database .............................................................................................. 171
Printing .............................................................................................................. 171
Communication Port .......................................................................................... 172
Remote Software ............................................................................................... 172
Instrument Tray Scan ........................................................................................ 187
Staining Run ...................................................................................................... 189
Reagent Access Point ....................................................................................... 191
Database Table Repair ...................................................................................... 192
Ultimate Reagent Access ................................................................................... 193
Reagent Access Points and Adding New Slides ........................................... 193
Reagent Access Points and Manual Reagent Application ............................. 193
Expired, Exhausted, Ownership, Registration, Duplication Issues .............. 193
Missing Reagents – New Slides ................................................................... 194
Missing Reagents – Processing Slides ......................................................... 194
Reagent Positioning ..................................................................................... 195
Chapter 18. Manage Inventory ...................................................................197

About Inventory Management ................................................................................. 197
How It Works ...................................................................................................... 197
Reagents ............................................................................................................ 197
Bulk Fluids .......................................................................................................... 198
Products from Ventana ....................................................................................... 198
One-Touch Registration ................................................................................. 198
Reagent Dispensers ...................................................................................... 198
Products from Other Suppliers ........................................................................... 199
The Inventory List .................................................................................................... 200
View Product Details ............................................................................................... 201
In the Inventory List ............................................................................................ 201
In View Registered Products .............................................................................. 202
Organize the Inventory List ..................................................................................... 203
Move Columns .................................................................................................... 203
Sort Product Records ......................................................................................... 203
24814EN Rev E xi
Sort Using Column Headings ........................................................................ 203

Sort Using Column Options ........................................................................... 203
Group Products .................................................................................................. 204
Flag Items for Notification ................................................................................... 205
Retrieve Inventory Warnings .............................................................................. 206
Hide Kit Components ......................................................................................... 206
Custom Filter ...................................................................................................... 207
Print Inventory Reports ....................................................................................... 208
Print a Custom Report ........................................................................................ 208
Save a Custom Report ....................................................................................... 209
Open a Saved Report ......................................................................................... 209
Print a Detail Usage Report ................................................................................ 209
About the Dispenser, Vial, and Bulk Report Options ..................................... 209
About Error Messages ................................................................................... 209
To print a Detail Usage Report ...................................................................... 209
Print a Product Usage Report ............................................................................ 210
Print a Bulk Product Usage Report ................................................................... 211
Associate Bulk Products with Instruments .............................................................. 212
Register Ventana Products ..................................................................................... 213
Register Non-Ventana Products ............................................................................. 214
Log Products ...................................................................................................... 214
Log Fillable Antibodies ................................................................................... 215
Log Fillable Probes ........................................................................................ 217
Log Fillable Reagents .................................................................................... 218
Fill a Ventana Dispenser .................................................................................... 219
Fill a New Dispenser ...................................................................................... 219
Empty and Refill a Used Dispenser ............................................................... 220
Top Off a Partly Filled Dispenser ................................................................... 222
Deactivate Products ................................................................................................ 223
Reactivate Products ................................................................................................ 223
Chapter 19. Set Up the System .................................................................. 225

About Setup ............................................................................................................ 225
Slide Data Fields ................................................................................................ 225
Keycodes ............................................................................................................ 225
Reagent Access Permission and Login Passwords Enabled ............................. 225
Set Up the Host ....................................................................................................... 226
Enter Address for Report Headings ........................................................................ 227
Find Hardware Serial Numbers ............................................................................... 227
Set Up Passwords and Log-ins ............................................................................... 228
Define Slide Data Fields .......................................................................................... 229
Set End of Run Signal and Pre-Reagent Access Point Alarm ................................ 229
Set Up VLM Collaboration .................................................................................. 229
Open VLM Options ............................................................................................. 230
Specify VLM Options .......................................................................................... 230
Activate Keycode Slide Labeling ........................................................................ 231
Specify SLS Options ............................................................................................... 232
xii Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Update SLS for a New Label Roll or Ribbon ........................................................... 233

Cancel Setup Changes ........................................................................................... 233
Restore the Default Setup ....................................................................................... 233
Set Up User Accounts ............................................................................................. 233
About User Names and Passwords .................................................................... 233
The Administrator Account ............................................................................ 233
Passwords ..................................................................................................... 234
System Privileges .......................................................................................... 234
User Groups .................................................................................................. 234
Add a User Name and Password ....................................................................... 234
Change a User Name and Password ................................................................. 235
Delete a User Name and Password ................................................................... 236
Add a User Group ............................................................................................... 236
Change a User Group ........................................................................................ 236
Delete a User Group ........................................................................................... 237
Look Up User Names or Groups ........................................................................ 237
Manage Contacts .................................................................................................... 237
View or Change Contact Information .................................................................. 237
Add a Contact ..................................................................................................... 238
Delete a Contact ................................................................................................. 238
Print Contact Information .................................................................................... 238
Print a List of Contacts ....................................................................................... 239
Chapter 20. Cleaning and Maintenance .....................................................241

About Cleaning and Maintenance ........................................................................... 241
Go to Instrument Maintenance ........................................................................... 241
Go to Maintenance ............................................................................................. 242
Maintenance Check List .......................................................................................... 242
Print User Maintenance Logs .................................................................................. 243
Record Completed Maintenance ............................................................................. 243
About Decontamination Tasks ............................................................................ 244
View or Add Maintenance Notes ........................................................................ 244
Daily Maintenance ................................................................................................... 244
Wipe External Surfaces ...................................................................................... 244
Disinfect Waste Containers ................................................................................ 245
Clean Slide Drawers ........................................................................................... 245
Using the Clean Icon .......................................................................................... 246
Clean Icon Status .......................................................................................... 246
Starting a Cleaning Cycle Using the Clean Icon ............................................ 246
Aborting a Cleaning Cycle ............................................................................. 247
Weekly Maintenance ............................................................................................... 247
Back Up the Database ........................................................................................ 247
Run Database Maintenance ............................................................................... 248
Monthly Maintenance .............................................................................................. 248
Rinse Bulk Fluid Containers ............................................................................... 248
Wash and Brush Slide Heating Pads ................................................................. 248
Clean Waste Tub and Drain ............................................................................... 249
24814EN Rev E xiii

Quarterly Maintenance ............................................................................................ 249

Run Slide Heater Temperature Verifiers ............................................................ 249
Decontaminate Bulk Fluid Bottles ...................................................................... 250
Decontaminate Bulk Fluid Reservoirs ................................................................ 250
Decontamination Alert ................................................................................... 250
How Decontamination Works ........................................................................ 250
Two Decontamination Methods ..................................................................... 251
If You Need to Stop Decontamination ........................................................... 251
What You Need for Decontamination ............................................................ 252
Decontamination Record ............................................................................... 253
Prepare the Instrument for Decontamination ..................................................... 253
Decontaminate Reservoirs Using Tubing ........................................................... 254
Decontaminate Reservoirs Using Bottles ........................................................... 256
Database Management ........................................................................................... 259
How the System Archives Data .......................................................................... 259
Archive System Data .......................................................................................... 260
View the Archive Data ................................................................................... 262
Defragment the Hard Disk ....................................................................................... 262
Preventive Maintenance .......................................................................................... 263
About Preventive Maintenance .......................................................................... 263
Schedule Preventive Maintenance ..................................................................... 263
Chapter 21. Customization ........................................................................ 265

Label Templates ...................................................................................................... 265
Create a New Label Template ................................................................................ 266
Set the Font Size ................................................................................................ 266
Select the Field and Line Dimensions ................................................................ 266
Open the Field Properties View .......................................................................... 266
Design Fixed Prompt Fields ........................................................................... 267
Design Text Entry Fields ................................................................................ 267
Specify a List of Options ................................................................................ 268
Add a Date ..................................................................................................... 269
Add a Number or Letter to Labels ...................................................................... 270
Increment Numerically ................................................................................... 270
Increment Alphabetically ................................................................................ 271
Customize a Date Format .............................................................................. 273
Set the Default Template ........................................................................................ 273
Modify a Label Template ......................................................................................... 274
Delete a Label Template ......................................................................................... 274
Chapter 22. Connectivity ........................................................................... 275

LIS Connectivity ...................................................................................................... 275
Central Management ............................................................................................... 275
xiv Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Chapter 23. Troubleshooting ......................................................................277

Run Function Tests ................................................................................................. 277
Go to the Function Test List ............................................................................... 277
Home and Jog the Nozzle Plate ......................................................................... 277
Home and Jog the Reagent Carousel ................................................................ 278
Chapter A. Ventana Laboratory Manager ..................................................279

About the Ventana Laboratory Manager ................................................................. 279
Set Up VLM ............................................................................................................. 279
Monitor Connections ............................................................................................... 280
Monitor Data Elements ............................................................................................ 280
View VLM Events .................................................................................................... 281
Chapter B. Ventana Interface Point ............................................................283

About the Ventana Interface Point Software ........................................................... 283
Set Up Interface Options ......................................................................................... 283
Map Fields ............................................................................................................... 285
Field Mapper Buttons ......................................................................................... 286
Example: Map HL7 Code to Patient ID Field ...................................................... 287
View Case Result ............................................................................................... 289
View Protocols ........................................................................................................ 289
View Case Slides .................................................................................................... 289
Create a New Connection To a Client or Server. .................................................... 290
Open the Connection Options ............................................................................ 290
Add a Client Connection ..................................................................................... 290
Add a New Server Connection ........................................................................... 292
View Data Elements ........................................................................................... 293
View the Event Log ................................................................................................. 293
24814EN Rev E xv
xvi Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

List of Figures
Figure 1. Safety Symbols ................................................................................................. 9
Figure 2. Host System Components and Staining Instrument ....................................... 11
Figure 3. Product Registration ....................................................................................... 12
Figure 4. Printer and Label ............................................................................................ 12
Figure 5. Reagent Carousel and Dispensers .................................................................. 14
Figure 6. Independent Slide Drawers ............................................................................ 15
Figure 7. Bulk Reagent Dispensers ............................................................................... 15
Figure 8. Waste Containers ............................................................................................ 15
Figure 9. Software System Information ......................................................................... 16
Figure 10. Global Navigation ......................................................................................... 16
Figure 11. Instrument Bar ............................................................................................... 16
Figure 12. Communicator ............................................................................................... 17
Figure 13. Home View .................................................................................................... 17
Figure 14. Instrument View ............................................................................................ 18
Figure 15. Slide Histogram ............................................................................................. 19
Figure 16. Inventory List ................................................................................................ 20
Figure 17. Instrument View Ready Button ..................................................................... 21
Figure 18. Bulk Bottle Connectors ................................................................................. 21
Figure 19. Waste Container Lock ................................................................................... 22
Figure 20. Select Slide Labels Options ........................................................................... 22
Figure 21. Print a Slide Label ......................................................................................... 23
Figure 22. Apply a Label ................................................................................................ 23
Figure 23. Orders Icon .................................................................................................... 24
Figure 24. Order List ....................................................................................................... 24
Figure 25. Print Pick List ................................................................................................ 24
Figure 26. Pick List in Print Preview .............................................................................. 24
Figure 27. Dispensers in Tray ......................................................................................... 25
Figure 28. Tray Mounting ............................................................................................... 25
Figure 29. Slide Control Panel ........................................................................................ 25
Figure 30. Seat a Slide .................................................................................................... 25
Figure 31. Run Time ....................................................................................................... 26
Figure 32. VENTANA logo Shortcut Icon ..................................................................... 27
Figure 33. Splash Screen ................................................................................................. 27
24814EN Rev E xvii

List of Figures BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Figure 34. Software at Startup .........................................................................................28

Figure 35. Instrument On-Off Switch ..............................................................................28
Figure 36. Ready Button ..................................................................................................28
Figure 37. Instrument Bar in Running Mode ...................................................................29
Figure 38. BenchMark ULTRA Instrument .....................................................................31
Figure 39. Instrument Setup Button in the Home View ..................................................32
Figure 40. Instrument Setup View ...................................................................................32
Figure 41. Instrument Status Panel ..................................................................................33
Figure 42. Instrument Bar Indicators ...............................................................................33
Figure 43. Startup Modes .................................................................................................34
Figure 44. On-Off Switch ................................................................................................36
Figure 45. Drawer Button ................................................................................................37
Figure 46. Instrument Slide Control Panel ......................................................................37
Figure 47. Operate Selected Drawers ..............................................................................37
Figure 48. Software Slide Control Panel .........................................................................38
Figure 49. Abort Selected Slides .....................................................................................39
Figure 50. Icon Bar with Reagent Access Shortcut icon .................................................41
Figure 51. Reagent Access Shortcut Icon with Reagent Access Times ..........................41
Figure 52. Selected Reagent Access Shortcut Icon with Reagent Pick List ....................42
Figure 53. Setting Reagent Access Points from the Slide Histogram View ..................43
Figure 54. Selected Reagent Access Point from Reagent Histogram View
with Reagent Pick List ...................................................................................43
Figure 55. Order List Features .........................................................................................47
Figure 56. Orders Received from LIS ..............................................................................48
Figure 57. Order Data ......................................................................................................48
Figure 58. Filter Buttons ..................................................................................................50
Figure 59. Filter Builder ..................................................................................................50
Figure 60. Retrieve a Custom Filter .................................................................................51
Figure 61. Orders Grouped by Label ...............................................................................52
Figure 62. Order Details ..................................................................................................53
Figure 63. Re-create Option .............................................................................................55
Figure 64. Order Details ..................................................................................................55
Figure 65. Select Protocol ................................................................................................56
Figure 66. Re-create Order ..............................................................................................58
Figure 67. Order Grid Print Preview ................................................................................59
Figure 68. Pick List of Reagents ......................................................................................60
Figure 69. List Protocols by Instrument Type .................................................................61
Figure 70. New Protocol Editor View ............................................................................62
Figure 71. New Selectable Protocol Options .................................................................63
Figure 72. Pop up View of Protocol Selection ...............................................................64
Figure 73. Pop up View with Find Feature ......................................................................64
Figure 74. Sidebar View of Protocol Selections ..............................................................65
Figure 75. Protocol Quick Find in Protocol Editor ..........................................................65
xviii Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide List of Figures
Figure 76. Protocol Keyword Find Feature ................................................................... 66

Figure 77. Print Protocol from the Protocol Editor ......................................................... 67
Figure 78. Protocol Editor with Zoom Feature ............................................................... 67
Figure 79. Create a Protocol ........................................................................................... 68
Figure 80. Type Protocol Number .................................................................................. 68
Figure 81. Protocol Report Options ................................................................................ 69
Figure 82. View Protocols .............................................................................................. 70
Figure 83. Set Up a Protocol Report ............................................................................... 70
Figure 84. Print a Protocol Usage Report ....................................................................... 71
Figure 85. Slide Label Components ................................................................................ 73
Figure 86. Create Slide Label ........................................................................................ 74
Figure 87. Enter Slide Label Text ................................................................................... 75
Figure 88. Apply a Slide Label ....................................................................................... 77
Figure 89. Reprint Slide Labels ...................................................................................... 78
Figure 90. Slide Seated in Drawer .................................................................................. 81
Figure 91. Remove a Slide .............................................................................................. 81
Figure 92. Abort Selected Slides .................................................................................... 82
Figure 93. Instrument Bar Status Indicator ..................................................................... 82
Figure 94. Slide Information Pop-up Box ....................................................................... 83
Figure 95. Order Details-Slide Details ............................................................................ 83
Figure 96. Order Details—Slide Protocol ....................................................................... 84
Figure 97. Processing Time on the Slide Histogram ...................................................... 85
Figure 98. Turn On Drawer Lights ................................................................................. 86
Figure 99. Blue Light on Drawer .................................................................................... 86
Figure 100. Print Run Reports ........................................................................................ 87
Figure 101. Completed Run Report ................................................................................ 88
Figure 102. Protocol Steps in a Completed Run Report ................................................. 88
Figure 103. Protocol Steps in Stopped Run Report ........................................................ 88
Figure 104. Edit Slide Data ............................................................................................. 89
Figure 105. Case Reports ................................................................................................ 89
Figure 106. Print a Consolidated Run Report with User-Defined Options .................... 91
Figure 107. Consolidated Completed Run Report .......................................................... 92
Figure 108. Reagent Detect Sensor .............................................................................. 94
Figure 109. Reagent Carousel Hardware ...................................................................... 94
Figure 110. Reagent Dispensers ..................................................................................... 96
Figure 111. Reagent Tray and Holder ............................................................................. 97
Figure 112. Tray Mounting Holes and Carousel Studs ................................................... 97
Figure 113. Status Indicators .......................................................................................... 98
Figure 114. Reagent Information Pop-up Box ................................................................ 98
Figure 115. Product Details ............................................................................................ 99
Figure 116. Reagent Histogram ...................................................................................... 99
Figure 117. Instrument View with Reagent Grid Icon ................................................. 100
24814EN Rev E xix

Figure 118. Instrument View displaying the Reagent Grid with Zoom control,
Reagent Wheel, and Print icon ...................................................................101
Figure 119. Reagent Histogram View with Reagent Grid View Enabled .....................101
Figure 120. Reagent Grid and Multiple Column Sorting ..............................................102
Figure 121. Selected Reagent Access Point at Shortcut Icon with Reagent Pick List ...102
Figure 122. Report for Last Staining Run ......................................................................103
Figure 123. View Last Reagents ....................................................................................103
Figure 124. Register Ventana Products .........................................................................104
Figure 125. Product Registration Probe .........................................................................104
Figure 126. New Product in the Inventory List .............................................................104
Figure 127. Titration Information ..................................................................................105
Figure 128. Create a Titration Protocol .........................................................................106
Figure 129. Add a Titration Step to a Protocol ..............................................................106
Figure 130. Save Protocol ..............................................................................................106
Figure 131. Manual Applications Icon ..........................................................................108
Figure 132. Manual Applications List. ..........................................................................108
Figure 133. Titration Message in Communicator ..........................................................109
Figure 134. Select a Titer Run .......................................................................................109
Figure 135. Bulk Bottle Connectors ..............................................................................111
Figure 136. Waste Level Monitor ..................................................................................113
Figure 137. Set Maximum Waste Level ........................................................................114
Figure 138. Waste Container Lock ................................................................................115
Figure 139. Carboy, Spigot, and Threaded Connector ..................................................115
Figure 140. Spigot and Locknut .....................................................................................116
Figure 141. Spigot Handle Positions .............................................................................116
Figure 142. Control Block Information .........................................................................118
Figure 143. Log Control Slides ......................................................................................119
Figure 144. View Control Block Information ................................................................120
Figure 145. View a Series of Control Slides ..................................................................120
Figure 146. Enter a Case Request ..................................................................................121
Figure 147. List of Cases ...............................................................................................122
Figure 148. Cases Ordered .............................................................................................122
Figure 149. Select a Staining Run ..................................................................................123
Figure 150. Enter Quality Control Results ....................................................................123
Figure 151. Print Quality Control Results .....................................................................124
Figure 152. Quality Control Report ...............................................................................125
Figure 153. Case Report ................................................................................................127
Figure 154. Contact List ................................................................................................128
Figure 155. Contact Form ..............................................................................................128
Figure 156. Daily Maintenance Log ..............................................................................128
Figure 157. Inventory Report .........................................................................................129
Figure 158. Inventory Product Usage ............................................................................129
Figure 159. Detail Usage Report for Dispensers ...........................................................130
xx Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Figure 160. Detail Usage Report for Vials ................................................................... 130

Figure 161. Detail Usage Report for Bulks .................................................................. 131
Figure 162. Reagent Access Point Pick List ................................................................. 132
Figure 163. Manual Application List ............................................................................ 132
Figure 164. Order Grid ................................................................................................. 132
Figure 165. Selected Orders Pick List .......................................................................... 133
Figure 166. Full Procedure Protocol Report ................................................................. 133
Figure 167. Protocol Summary Report ......................................................................... 133
Figure 168. Protocol Usage Report ............................................................................... 134
Figure 169. Case Control Report .................................................................................. 134
Figure 170. Antibody Q.C. Report ................................................................................ 134
Figure 171. Probes Q.C. Report .................................................................................... 135
Figure 172. Dispensed Reagent Q.C. Report ................................................................ 135
Figure 173. Kit Q.C. Report .......................................................................................... 135
Figure 174. Bulk Q.C. Report ....................................................................................... 136
Figure 175. Block Report .............................................................................................. 136
Figure 176. Antigen Activity Failure of Control Slide Series ...................................... 136
Figure 177. Reagent Access traceability on Instrument Run Report. ........................... 137
Figure 178. Completed Staining Run Report ................................................................ 138
Figure 179. Stopped Staining Run Report .................................................................... 138
Figure 180. Consolidated Completed Staining Run Report ......................................... 139
Figure 181. Print Preview ............................................................................................. 140
Figure 182. Label Printer Setup .................................................................................... 141
Figure 183. Printer Parts ............................................................................................... 142
Figure 184. Printer Ribbon and Spindle ....................................................................... 143
Figure 185. Printer Ribbon Installed ............................................................................. 143
Figure 186. Update Label Roll or Ribbon .................................................................... 144
Figure 187. View Messages for All Instruments .......................................................... 145
Figure 188. Message Types .......................................................................................... 145
Figure 189. Resize the Communicator .......................................................................... 145
Figure 190. Error Message Comments ......................................................................... 146
Figure 191. Registering Non-Ventana Products ........................................................... 199
Figure 192. Inventory List ............................................................................................ 200
Figure 193. Inventory List Buttons ............................................................................... 200
Figure 194. Product Detail ............................................................................................ 201
Figure 195. View Registered Products ......................................................................... 202
Figure 196. Kit Components ......................................................................................... 202
Figure 197. Move a Column ......................................................................................... 203
Figure 198. Sort by Column Heading ........................................................................... 203
Figure 199. Column Options ........................................................................................ 203
Figure 200. Inventory Grouped by Field ...................................................................... 204
Figure 201. Inventory Filtered by Group ...................................................................... 204
Figure 202. Inventory Quick Find Near ........................................................................ 205
24814EN Rev E xxi

Figure 203. Inventory Flag ............................................................................................205

Figure 204. Flagged Inventory Records .........................................................................205
Figure 205. Quick Find Near .........................................................................................206
Figure 206. Layout Warnings Option ............................................................................206
Figure 207. Filter Buttons ..............................................................................................207
Figure 208. Filter Builder ..............................................................................................207
Figure 209. Custom Inventory Report ...........................................................................208
Figure 210. Inventory Report Preview ...........................................................................208
Figure 211. Access the Detail Usage Report from the Inventory View ........................210
Figure 212. Print Product Usage Report ........................................................................210
Figure 213. Product Usage Report Preview ...................................................................211
Figure 214. Print a Bulk Product Usage Report ............................................................211
Figure 215. Bulk Product Usage Report ........................................................................212
Figure 216. Associate Bulk Products .............................................................................212
Figure 217. Register Ventana Products .........................................................................213
Figure 218. Registration Probe and Memory Button .....................................................213
Figure 219. New Product in the Inventory List .............................................................213
Figure 220. Log an Existing Product .............................................................................214
Figure 221. Log a New Product .....................................................................................214
Figure 222. Log a Fillable Antibody ..............................................................................215
Figure 223. Log a New Fillable Antibody .....................................................................216
Figure 224. Log a Fillable Probe ...................................................................................217
Figure 225. Log a New Fillable Probe ...........................................................................217
Figure 226. Log a Fillable Reagent ................................................................................218
Figure 227. Log a New Fillable Reagent .......................................................................219
Figure 228. Choose a Dispenser ....................................................................................219
Figure 229. Choose a Reagent .......................................................................................220
Figure 230. Fill a Dispenser ...........................................................................................220
Figure 231. Filled Dispenser Record .............................................................................220
Figure 232. Choose a Dispenser ....................................................................................221
Figure 233. Choose a Product ........................................................................................221
Figure 234. Empty and Refill Dispenser ........................................................................221
Figure 235. Top Off a Dispenser ...................................................................................222
Figure 236. Topped-Off Dispenser Record ...................................................................222
Figure 237. Product Deactivate Button ..........................................................................223
Figure 238. Host Options Tab ........................................................................................226
Figure 239. Institution Tab ............................................................................................227
Figure 240. Instrument Info Tab ....................................................................................227
Figure 241. Security Tab ................................................................................................228
Figure 242. Slide Data Tab ............................................................................................229
Figure 243. Stainer Options Tab ....................................................................................229
Figure 244. VLM Options ..............................................................................................230
Figure 245. SLS Options ...............................................................................................232
xxii Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Figure 246. Set Up Names and Passwords ................................................................... 234

Figure 247. Set Up User Groups ................................................................................... 236
Figure 248. View the Contact List ................................................................................ 237
Figure 249. Add or Change Contact Information ......................................................... 238
Figure 250. Instrument Maintenance Icon in Instrument View .................................... 241
Figure 251. Instrument Maintenance View .................................................................. 241
Figure 252. Maintenance Button in the Home View ................................................... 242
Figure 253. Maintenance View ..................................................................................... 242
Figure 254. Maintenance Report ................................................................................... 243
Figure 255. Monthly User Maintenance Log ................................................................ 243
Figure 256. Record User Maintenance Monthly ........................................................... 244
Figure 257. User Maintenance Notes ............................................................................ 244
Figure 258. Clean Slide Drawers .................................................................................. 245
Figure 259. The Clean Icon in the Instrument View .................................................... 246
Figure 260. Instrument View with the Cleaning Cycle Running .................................. 247
Figure 261. Database Backup Progress ........................................................................ 247
Figure 262. Database Maintenance ............................................................................... 248
Figure 263. Empty and Fill Bulk Bottles ...................................................................... 248
Figure 264. Clean the Waste Tub ................................................................................. 249
Figure 265. Run Temperature Verifiers ........................................................................ 249
Figure 266. Decontamination Alert in Instrument View .............................................. 250
Figure 267. Decontamination Status Marker ................................................................ 251
Figure 268. Decontamination Indicator ........................................................................ 251
Figure 269. Decontamination Record ........................................................................... 253
Figure 270. Logged Decontamination .......................................................................... 253
Figure 271. Decontamination Tubing Manifold ........................................................... 254
Figure 272. Instrument View Instrument Maintenance Icon ........................................ 254
Figure 273. Decontaminate Using Tubing .................................................................... 255
Figure 274. Instrument View Instrument Maintenance Icon ........................................ 257
Figure 275. Decontamination View .............................................................................. 257
Figure 276. Archive System Data ................................................................................. 260
Figure 277. Archive Location Field .............................................................................. 261
Figure 278. Select Archive Folder ................................................................................ 261
Figure 279. View Archive Data .................................................................................... 262
Figure 280. Windows Defragment Button and Monitor ............................................... 263
Figure 281. Schedule Preventive Maintenance ............................................................. 263
Figure 282. Preventive Maintenance Challenge Code .................................................. 264
Figure 283. Design Label Options ................................................................................ 265
Figure 284. Field Properties Options ............................................................................ 267
Figure 285. Text Box Options ...................................................................................... 267
Figure 286. List Options ............................................................................................... 268
Figure 287. Date Options .............................................................................................. 269
Figure 288. Number Options ........................................................................................ 270
24814EN Rev E xxiii

Figure 289. Increment by Number .................................................................................270

Figure 290. Increment Labels by Number .....................................................................271
Figure 291. Letter Options .............................................................................................271
Figure 292. Increment by Letter ....................................................................................272
Figure 293. Increment Labels by Letter .........................................................................272
Figure 294. Text and Date Options ................................................................................273
Figure 295. Central Management Architecture .............................................................275
Figure 296. VLM Icon ...................................................................................................279
Figure 297. VLM Settings .............................................................................................279
Figure 298. Monitor VLM Events .................................................................................281
Figure 299. VIP Icon ......................................................................................................283
Figure 300. VIP HL7 Interface ......................................................................................283
Figure 301. VIP HL7 Message Format ..........................................................................285
Figure 302. VIP Field Mapper Buttons ..........................................................................286
Figure 303. Map HL7 Code to a Field ...........................................................................287
Figure 304. Field Options ..............................................................................................287
Figure 305. Function Options .......................................................................................288
Figure 306. HL7 Code Options ......................................................................................288
Figure 307. VIP Case Result Tab ..................................................................................289
Figure 308. LIS Connections .........................................................................................290
Figure 309. New LIS Connection ..................................................................................290
Figure 310. New Client Connection ..............................................................................290
Figure 311. New Server Connection ..............................................................................292
Figure 312. Data Elements .............................................................................................293
Figure 313. Message Transaction Event Log ................................................................293
xxiv Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Regulatory Notices
Compliance with Standards

The BenchMark ULTRA instrument is manufactured and certified per the following applicable international
standards.
IEC/EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,

control and laboratory use.
IEC 61010-2-010 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,

Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 2-010: Particular Requirements
for Laboratory Equipment for the Heating of Materials.
EN 61010-2-081 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,

control, and laboratory use – Part 2-081: Particular requirements
for automatic and semi-automatic laboratory equipment for
analysis and other purposes.
EN 61010-2-101 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,

control, and laboratory use – Part 2-101: Particular requirements
for in vitro diagnostic (IVD) medical equipment
EN 61326-2-6 Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use

- EMC requirements – Part 2-6: Particular requirements - In vitro
diagnostic (IVD) medical equipment; IEC 61326-2-6:2005.
IEC/EN 60825-1 Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and

Ed. 2:2007 requirements.
Regulatory compliance is demonstrated by the following marks:
Complies with the European Union Directive 98/79/EC.
Issued by CSA.
Separate collection for electrical and electronic equipment.
24814EN Rev E xxv

Regulatory Notices BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Intended Use
The BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System is intended to automatically stain histological or
cytological specimens on microscope slides with specific immunohistochemistry or in situ hybridization
reagents for in vitro diagnostic use. Evolved from the BenchMark series of instruments, the BenchMark
ULTRA instrument fully automates the processes of baking, deparaffinization, and staining.
Intended Purpose
The system is intended to be run by trained laboratory personnel, such as histotechnologists and laboratory
technicians, who are expert in histology processes and have basic computer operation skills. The system is
intended to be installed in an anatomical laboratory environment and must be used in a manner consistent with
industry practices for safety, security, regulatory, environmental, ergonomic, workflow, and information
technology.
FCC Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy; if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at
their own expense. There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a different circuit from the one the receiver is connected to.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION: CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY

RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES COULD VOID THE
USER'S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.
Canadian DOC Information

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatuses as
set out in the Radio Frequency Regulations of the Department of Communications (DOC).
xxvi Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide Regulatory Notices
Specifications
Physical Characteristics Stainer Assembly (05342716001 / 750-600)
Size (W x D x H) 44.00" x 33.10" x 62.40" (111.76 x 84.07 x 158.50 cm)
Size (W x D x H w/rear cover 44.00” x 28.30” x 62.40” (111.76 x 71.88 x 158.50 cm)
removed)
Weight dry 550 lbs. (250 kg)

Weight with bulk fluids 671 lbs. (305 kg)
Weight dry in shipping crate 850 lbs. (386 kg)
Clearances Top 15" (38.1 cm)

Sides 4" (10.2 cm)
Rear 6" (15.2 cm)
Electrical
Characteristics U.S. and Canada Japan Europe
Voltage ~120 VAC ~100 VAC ~230 VAC
Current 6 Amps 6 Amps 4 Amps
Frequency 50/60 Hz. 50/60 Hz. 50/60 Hz.
Power Connection Cord suited to country. For U.S., standard 3-prong grounded.
Environmental Requirements
Noise Specifications Less than 70 dBA.
Heat Output Output 400 BTU/hr idle, 1550 BTU/hr running.
Operating 20°C to 32°C (68°F to 90°F). (The instrument may be unable to

Temperature Range maintain proper reaction temperature if laboratory ambient
temperature exceeds the specified temperature range.)
Operating Humidity 20% to 90% rH, non-condensing.
Location For indoor use only.

Flat, level surface.
No direct sunlight or drafts.
Remove from sources of direct heat and moisture.
Maximum altitude 6000’ (1828 m) above sea level.
Position the instrument so that the main plug can easily be removed
from the power outlet.
Ingress Protection Ordinary
24814EN Rev E xxvii

Regulatory Notices BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Installation Environment (Reference IEC 61010)
Pollution degree 2 Office and laboratory
Installation-Measurement category II Equipment connected to a wall outlet
Instrument intended for indoor use only.
Temperature Control
Slide heater 37°C to 100°C ± 2.0°C
General Characteristics
Capability 30 independent slide processing
Slide Tray 1 to 30 positions - continuous access
Throughput 90 slides in 8 hours (standard IHC samples)
Reagent 35 reagent positions

Carousel
Slides 25 x 75 mm, 1 x 3 inches or 26 x 76 mm positively-charged microscope slides
Modularity 1 to 8 BenchMark ULTRA instruments may be controlled from one PC system
Water Quality NCCLS Type II water or equivalent (referred to as deionized water)
Bulk Reagents Up to 7 different bulk reagents in 3- to 6-liter continuous access on-board

containers
Disposal at End of Useful Life

At the end of its useful life, this equipment must be disposed of in accordance with local and/or national
environmental requirements.
xxviii Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

CHAPTER 1
Welcome
The BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System takes the automated staining process to a new level.
• Continuous and random access increase efficiency and boost throughput.
• Dual and triple staining expand medical utility.
• New software gives the operator instant and easy access to staining information.
• Reducing manual laboratory touch points improves safety.
The BenchMark ULTRA instrument’s expanded features advance the staining process while maintaining the
BenchMark instrument standard of excellence and ensuring compatibility with current Ventana Medical
Systems, Inc. (Ventana) systems and products.
Description
The BenchMark ULTRA system includes a hardware staining instrument, reagents, host computer with system
software, connectivity software, and system peripherals. The staining instrument performs all operations
required to automatically process slides for immunohistochemistry (IHC) and in situ hybridization (ISH)
staining.
The system’s two main components are a computer with software and a staining instrument. The software can
be linked to as many as eight instruments so the operator can monitor and manage all instruments from a single
workstation. The software and instruments communicate with each other continuously. Instrument sensors read
slide and reagent bar codes, monitor fluids, and track slide processing and feed the information to the
computer. The computer plans the staining run, tells the operator which reagents to load, and starts the run at
the push of a button. During the run the instrument continues to detect conditions and feed information to the
computer.
The computer provides a graphic view of each instrument. It tells the operator where each slide is in its
processing, which reagent containers to remove or load, and when waste containers need to be emptied. It
announces problems, needs, or errors in a message display panel, and by simply resting the cursor on a slide
image, the operator can view slide information such as patient and doctor identification, protocol, and dates.
Similarly, resting the cursor on a reagent image brings up information such as reagent name and number,
dispenses left, and expiration date.
The BenchMark ULTRA system also expands and enhances functions that support slide processing, including
automating protocol handling, label printing, orders, inventory, case management, reagent registration,
reporting, and system maintenance.
24814EN Rev E 1
1 Welcome BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
System Capabilities
Staining Capabilities
The BenchMark ULTRA system automates IHC and ISH BTS on microscope slides in anatomical pathology,
including formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded sections, cytology preps, and frozen sections.
Operating Capabilities
• Random processing: Stain any slide with any process, independent of other slide states or processes.
• Single piece flow: Add new slides for processing and remove completed slides while the processing of
other slides continues. If you need to add or remove reagents, you can schedule a system-calculated
pause—called a reagent access point. Reagent access points are intervals when you can access to the
reagent carousel to add or remove a reagent without harming or delaying the runtimes of slides in process.
• Modularity: Add staining systems as capacity or lab needs increase.
• Flexibility: Optimize protocols, reagents, and timing to facilitate best lab practices and tissue fixation.
Staining Management
The BenchMark ULTRA system can be integrated with current VENTANA Advanced Staining Systems or
BenchMark Special Stains systems for the purposes of performing staining operations for clinical and research
diagnostics.
• Accession, run, and report the staining process and manage reagents, staining protocols, users, and slide
cases.
• Quick visual presentation of system, slide, and case status.
IHC
The ability to define and store protocols for IHC staining ensures reliable, high-quality results. Protocols are
defined step by step and saved on the computer. When IHC staining is required, you can recall the protocol and
print it on a slide bar code label. The staining instrument reads the protocol from the bar code and applies the
defined detection procedure and staining process.
ISH
• Faster turnaround of routine and complex staining.
• Reduced processing time—SISH 6 hours and IHC 2 ½ hours.
Dual Stains
• Simultaneous phenotyping and genotyping—IHC and ISH.
• Multiple markers recognized on a single slide—IHC and IHC, ISH and ISH.
Integration into Your Workflow

Connectivity
The following connectivity options are available for the BenchMark ULTRA system. They are not included in
the basic package.
2 Ventana Medical Systems, Inc. A Member of the Roche Group

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 1 Welcome
• The Laboratory Information System (LIS) interface connects the laboratory system to an institutional LIS
to send and receive data or enhance workflow in the laboratory.
• Central Management synchronizes multiple Ventana host computers and associated staining systems to
easily deploy and integrate the system into the laboratory workflow.
• The VENTANA Image Analysis System (VIAS) interface connects to the VIAS system to provide data
needed to maintain or enhance imaging workflow.
Vantage Compatibility
The VENTANA Vantage workflow solution can reduce errors by improving the ability to track slides. It
eliminates or reduces multiple labeling of specimen slides, unnecessary specimen batching, and lack of
information about specimen locations.
• Recognizes both barcode symbology and 2D symbology.
• Reduces slide handling errors.
24814EN Rev E 3
1 Welcome BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide

CHAPTER 2
Warnings and Precautions
Safety Compliance
All safety related regulations, local codes, and instructions that appear in the manual or on equipment must be
observed to ensure personal safety and to prevent damage to the instrument or equipment connected to it. If
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment
may be impaired.
Avoiding Injury
Biological and Chemical Hazards
Some of the reagents used in immunohistochemistry are hazardous. Be aware of local regulations and correct
procedures for handling and disposing of hazardous material. When working with any reagent or reagent
container, take appropriate precautions.
Reagent may collect around the container lid during transit and storage and be released when the reagent lid is
opened. Open containers carefully.
During system operation, reagent may collect around the slide staining assemblies and could contaminate slide
trays. Though risk to people and surroundings is minimal, routine precautions should be observed while
handling slide trays.
CAUTION: When working with any reagent or reagent container, take appropriate precautions.
CAUTION: Open reagent containers carefully.
CAUTION: Avoid unnecessary contact with reagents and reagent containers.
CAUTION: Always wear approved eye protection, gloves, and protective clothing when you handle
reagents, reagent containers, slide trays, or preparation trays.
Spills
Clean spills with a disinfectant solution such as Lysol IC or equivalent. Do not allow xylene, chloroform,
acetone, strong acids (like 20% HCl), strong alkalis (like 20% NaOH), or other similar solvents near the stainer
subassembly. Clean up any spills immediately.
24814EN Rev E 5
2 Warnings and Precautions BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
WARNING: Wipe up spills immediately to avoid slipping.
WARNING: Place mats around the instrument to avoid risk of slipping in the event of reagent
spills or leaks.
CAUTION: Place caps on waste carboys before removing them from the instrument.
CAUTION: Wheel waste carboys to the disposal area instead of lifting them.
Cleaning and Maintenance

To keep the system in peak condition, follow the instructions in Chapter 20, Cleaning and Maintenance, and
use only replacement parts supplied by Ventana or an approved provider.
Instrument Location
The instrument is very heavy and is not designed to be moved by the user. Please contact an approved service
representative if you need to re-locate your instrument. This instrument is for indoor use only.
WARNING: The instrument should be moved only by approved service technicians.
Safety Training
All operators must be trained in the safe use of the BenchMark ULTRA instrument. After training, operators
must demonstrate understanding of the following:
• The instrument must be connected to a grounded outlet.
• The instrument must be connected to a voltage source that complies with the rating label.
• Using instruments in a manner not specified by Ventana Medical Systems, Inc. (VMSI) may impair
protection provided by the equipment.
• Filters and tubing may be replaced only by VMSI service technicians.
• Operators must use caution when interacting with the reagent carousel, dispensers, and dispenser actuator,
when changing reagents during a reagent access point.
• Operators must keep their hands clear of potential pinch points, including slide trays and the reagent
carousel.
• Operators must consult the Material Safety Data Sheets for instructions for safe handling and disposal of
reagents used with the instrument.
Electrical Hazards
Dangerous voltages are present inside the instrument. Only VMSI approved service technicians should remove
any of the instrument covers or access the internal components of the instrument.
The instrument’s operating voltage is set during installation and may be changed only by VMSI approved
service technicians.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 2 Warnings and Precautions
The instrument must be connected to a grounded power outlet that is easily accessible to VMSI service
technicians.
Use only power strips provided or approved by VMSI.
In the unusual circumstance that the instrument supply voltage is to change, contact VMSI to have the setting
changed. Severe damage may occur if the instrument is connected to an incorrect power supply voltage.
CAUTION: Observe good electrical safety practices.
WARNING: Only VMSI personnel or VMSI-trained technicians should change fuses.
WARNING: Do not place the instrument power strip on the floor.
WARNING: Place mats around the instrument to avoid risk of electrical shock in the event of
reagent spills or leaks.
Stainer Subassembly Operation

The instrument has a moving metal robotic arm that may move without warning.
The instrument includes interlocks that stop operation when the instrument hood is open. Do not attempt to
open the hood while a run is in progress or bypass the interlocks.
Only laboratory technicians who have been trained to use the Ultimate Reagent Access feature should open the
instrument hood. Open the instrument hood only during a scheduled reagent access point. When reagents are
added or removed from the reagent carousel, be aware of the moving metal robotic arm as it slowly moves
across the slide positions. Several hardware pieces cover hot surfaces and minimize gaps between the
instrument moving parts. Please note that there are hot surfaces on the slide surface and heater pad assembly,
below the roof support piece and slide roofs.
WARNING: Only service technicians authorized by VMSI should take apart any component of the
instrument.
WARNING: Keep hands clear of hot surfaces and moving parts.
WARNING: Only open the instrument hood during a scheduled reagent access point.
WARNING: Do not attempt to bypass or disable safety features.
24814EN Rev E 7
Symbols
The following symbols are used in the BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System.
CAUTION: REFER TO ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS

Consult accompanying document for proper use of this device (ISO 3864/ ANSI
535.4; ISO 15223:2000 (E) section 3.4).
CAUTION: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
CAUTION: SHOCK HAZARD—DO NOT EXPOSE TO WATER (ISO 3864) This

symbol indicates the potential for electrical shock if electrical components are
exposed to fluid.
CAUTION: HOT SURFACE
CAUTION: BIOLOGICAL RISK
CAUTION: PINCH POINT
CAUTION: DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE SERVICING
CAUTION: SLIP HAZARD (ISO 3864/ANSIZ535.4)
ON AND OFF SYMBOL ON POWER SWITCH
PROTECTIVE EARTH
SEPARATE COLLECTION FOR ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 2 Warnings and Precautions
CAUTION: LASER ON BOARD

This instrument contains a Class 2 laser per
IEC/EN 60825-1 Ed.2:2007.
WARNING: LED RADIATION. DO NOT VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS.
CLASS 1M LED PRODUCT.
Figure 1. Safety Symbols
24814EN Rev E 9

CHAPTER 3
The BenchMark ULTRA System
Theory and Principles of Instrument Operation

The BenchMark ULTRA system includes a staining instrument, a computer with system software installed, a
flat screen computer monitor, a label printer, a report printer, a USB flash disk, a mouse, a product registration
probe, and three carboys. The system is installed by Ventana technicians or technicians approved by Ventana.
System Components
Figure 2. Host System Components and Staining Instrument
Staining Instrument
The staining instrument houses slide drawers, a reagent dispensing system, bulk reagents, and waste
containers. It is controlled by the Ventana System Software (VSS).
Computer
The computer comes with all system software installed and runs Windows-based programs. From one to eight
BenchMark ULTRA instruments can be connected to it using communications cabling. The computer includes
a hardware key used by the software for quality control, data management, and security.
24814EN Rev E 11
3 The BenchMark ULTRA System BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Product Registration Probe

All VENTANA reagents, kits, antibodies, and bulk products
are packaged with a memory button (1) attached to the
container. The product registration probe (2) is attached to the
computer. When you touch the probe to the memory button, it
reads the product information and transfers it to the computer.
All the information you need to use the product is entered
automatically and accurately.
Figure 3. Product Registration
Label and Report Printers

The system includes a color ink-jet printer for printing
reports and screen images, and an E-bar II high-speed
label printer, designed for use with VENTANA
Advanced Staining Systems.
The E-bar II printer is controlled by the Slide Labeling
System (SLS), the same labeling system used with
printers previously supplied by Ventana. SLS creates
customized labels for use with BenchMark ULTRA
instruments and BenchMark XT instruments. Labels
include a protocol name and a bar code. They can be
customized to include other information, such as Figure 4. Printer and Label
patient name.
USB Flash Disk

The BenchMark ULTRA system uses a USB flash disk to store system data. The flash disk stays in the USB
slot during normal software operation.
Products
All dispensers and most bulk reagents are compatible with the BenchMark XT instrument. However, ULTRA
CC1, ULTRA CC2, and ULTRA LCS have been specifically optimized for use with the BenchMark ULTRA
instrument. Reagents may be purchased from Ventana or from other suppliers. Products from other suppliers
must be registered in the VENTANA system. They should be validated by the customer and the validation
records retained, in accordance with CAP/CLIA and other applicable regulatory guidelines.
The instrument is designed and validated to use the following slides:
• 1 x 3 inch, 25 x 75 mm, and 26 x 76 mm original Superfrost Plus charged slides for tissue sections.
• Tripath slides for the Tripath HPV application.
• Cytyc slides for the Cytyc LBP application.
If slides other than those listed above are used, the customer should refer to the glass manufacturer’s
instructions for use, validate the slides, and keep the validation records, in accordance with CAP/CLIA and
other applicable regulatory guidelines.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 3 The BenchMark ULTRA System
How the System Works

With the BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System, you can define step-by-step instructions for
immunohistochemistry (IHC) and in situ hybridization (ISH) staining, choose protocols, print slide labels, and
monitor staining runs. Information about each run is updated continually and displayed in a graphic format.
You can quickly and easily find out when slides will be completed, so you can respond promptly to pathologist
inquiries and be ready to load new orders when slide drawers become available.
Starting a Staining Run

You start a routine staining run by selecting a staining protocol, printing slide labels, and loading slides and
applicable reagents onto the instrument. The staining protocol is a set of reagent definitions and application
instructions—such as enzyme application, antibody incubation times, and counterstain. You can define and
save protocols and associate them with patient orders as needed. Slide labels include a bar code that identifies
the protocol, the instrument being used, and the patient order. Additional text can be printed on the label for
your own use.
Reagent dispensers contain a preprinted bar code. The BenchMark ULTRA system uses the bar code to
determine the position of the reagent on the instrument.
After you load the slides and reagents, you click a button to start the run. The instrument reads the bar codes on
the dispensers and slide labels. The software matches the reagents and slides to the protocol and plans the
staining run. If a protocol requires a reagent that is not on the reagent carousel, a message notifies the operator.
Monitoring a Run
In the Ventana System Software you can monitor all connected instruments in a single glance. Color-coded
indicators show the status of reagents, slides, bulk reagents, and waste level for each instrument. Information
and warning messages tell you what the system is doing and alert you to any problems or required actions.
The software also provides a detailed view of each instrument, with instrument, reagent dispensers, slides, and
waste represented as images. You can mouse over or click images to see detailed information. Details can
include time to run completion, countdown to the next required action, type of action required, and status of
bulk bottles and waste containers. Histogram views of slides and reagents present real-time details for current
processing.
Continuous Access Processing

An innovative feature of the BenchMark ULTRA instrument is continuous access to 30 separate slide drawers.
Drawers operate independently, so you can load and unload slides while continuing to process others.
Continuous access gives you the flexibility to batch antibody runs, add new orders when drawers are available,
and remove completed slides and immediately start more. Color-coded indicators on the slide drawers and in
the software indicate available drawers and alert you when slides are ready to be unloaded.
Bulk Fluids and Waste

Bulk bottles and waste containers can be removed and replaced while the instrument is running. Reagent is
dispensed from an on-board reservoir behind its bottle. The reservoir holds enough fluid to process up to 30
slides. Each bulk reagent bottle is plumbed individually to the same nozzle to reduce variability and improve
staining quality.
Waste containers are monitored and managed by the BenchMark ULTRA system. When a run begins, the
system calculates the amount of waste the slide will generate. It drains fluids into one container, automatically
locking that container while it is in use. When the container is full, the system automatically switches to the
other container, unlocks the full container, and alerts the operator to empty it.
24814EN Rev E 13
Ultimate Reagent Access Feature

The Ultimate Reagent Access feature allows you to open the reagent hood during times when reagents are not
being dispensed and does not require interruption of or delay to processing slides.
Each time the instrument cycles over the 30 slide drawers, it takes four minutes. During these four minute
cycles, processing slides will be in the following states: 1) Rinsing, 2) Incubating, or 3) Dispensing. Access to
the reagent carousel will be allowed when all slides on the instrument are either in the Rinsing or Incubation
state during the four minute cycle. If a reagent dispense is required during a four minute cycle, reagent access
will not be allowed.
Staining Slides
As the staining run progresses, the reagent carousel and instrument nozzle plate swing back and forth on an arc,
dispensing and removing reagents. Vortex mixers ensure the reagents are mixed and applied evenly to the
slides. A chemical-based liquid coverslip is applied to each slide to prevent evaporation of reagents,
dehydration of tissue, and drying artifacts. Between reagent applications, a dual rinse washes slides clean and
leaves a controlled amount of buffer solution on them. A pressurized-hose system dispenses bulk reagents and
moves fluid to the waste containers. When a staining run is complete, green lights flash on the instrument slide
drawers.
The BenchMark ULTRA Instrument

The BenchMark ULTRA staining instrument includes a reagent hood, reagent carousel, independent slide
drawers, a slide control panel, an instrument status panel, and a fluidics system to manage bulk reagents and
waste containers.
The following sections describe the main parts of the instrument. Chapter 4 gives step-by-step instructions for
a basic run. Chapter 6 provides more information about using the instrument.
Reagent Hood
A large semi-circular transparent hood covers the reagent carousel. To protect slides, operator, and equipment,
the lid locks automatically when the stainer is running.
Reagent Carousel
The reagent carousel (1) holds 35 reagent dispensers in five
trays of seven dispensers each. Dispenser trays (2) are
removable. When not in use, they are stored on magnetic
tray holders that help protect dispenser tips. When installed
on the reagent carousel, the trays are secured by mounting
holes that fit over mounting studs on the carousel.
Figure 5. Reagent Carousel and Dispensers

Slide Drawers
Independent slide drawers are numbered 1 to 30. Slides can be
loaded in any drawer in any order. Every drawer runs
independently and has its own open and close button and
individual status lights. You can use the software to locate all of
the slides in an order. Located slides are indicated by a blue light
at the bottom of the slide drawer.
Figure 6. Independent Slide Drawers
Each slide rests on a slide heating pad in the bed of the slide drawer. The temperature of each pad is controlled
independently by software and staining protocols.
A Slide Control Panel, located between drawers 15 and 16, provides a separate set of buttons to operate
multiple drawers simultaneously. You can open all available drawers, open all drawers with completed slides,
or close all open drawers. The same operations can be done using a similar Slide Control Panel in the Ventana
System Software. You can also operate slide drawers using the Selected Slide Actions in the software. The
actions are Abort, Open, or Close. Any action can be applied to one or more selected slides.
Instrument Status Panel

The status of each of the instrument’s main parts is indicated by lighted icons on the front of the instrument.
Bulk Reagents
Up to seven bottles of bulk
reagent are loaded at the front
of the instrument. Bottles are
translucent so you can see
their fluid levels.
Figure 7. Bulk Reagent Dispensers
Each bottle is secured to the instrument with a quick-disconnect latch and backed up by a reservoir that holds
fluid for an additional 30 slides. Fluid from the bottle runs into the reservoir, and the reservoir pushes the fluid
onto the slides. A float in the reservoir tells the system when the fluid level is too low. If fluids are not
sufficient for the planned run, the system alerts the operator and waits for the problem to be corrected.
Waste Containers
Two 20-liter waste containers sit behind the two front
doors at the bottom of the instrument. Tubing carries
waste liquid through the cap opening into the
container. While a container is in use, the instrument
locks it in place. Sensors above the containers detect
the fluid levels. When one container is full the
Figure 8. Waste Containers instrument switches to the other one and prompts you
to empty the full one. The waste container icon on the
Instrument Status Panel indicates whether a container
is removed or in use. Waste levels are also displayed
on the computer.
24814EN Rev E 15
The Ventana System Software

The Ventana System Software provides easy access to key functions and processing information. Three
features in the upper screen—the Global Navigation, Instrument Bar, and Communicator—are available
everywhere in the software. The Home View appears in the lower screen at startup. It provides System buttons
to navigate to other functions and shows images of connected instruments.
Some key software features are described in this section.
System Information and Software Version Control

In the Home View, you can click the System Info button to see the VSS Software part number and revision
number.
Figure 9. Software System Information
Global Navigation
Figure 10. Global Navigation
The Global Navigation bar is at the top of the screen. From anywhere in the system, the Global Navigation
icons go directly to: 1) Home View, 2) the Login window, 3) the Order List, where you can view and manage
orders and labels, and 4) the Inventory List, where you can view and manage products.
Instrument Bar
The Instrument Bar is below the Global Navigation. It shows status information for each instrument connected
to the computer. Status is indicated by colored lights. When an instrument is connected and idle, its indicators
are green. During slide processing, indicators are yellow.
(1) Instrument status indicators.
(2) Next operator action.
(3) Time until next action.
Figure 11. Instrument Bar
Communicator
The Communicator shows information and error messages for connected instruments. Each message is
associated with a timestamp and an icon representing the message type. For error messages, a Sign Off button

appears at the right of the panel. You can click the resize arrow to expand or shrink the message area. You can
also enter notes about a message.
Figure 12. Communicator
Home View
When the software starts up, the Home View appears in the lower part of the screen. It shows the same data as
the Instrument Bar, but in a graphic format. It also provides System buttons to go to other software functions
and an Instrument Setup button for configuring instruments. You can click the Home icon in the Global
Navigation to return to this view from anywhere in the system.
Figure 13. Home View
Instrument View
The Instrument View shows processing information and has buttons that operate the instrument. To go to an
Instrument View, you click the instrument name in the Instrument Bar or the instrument image in the Home
View.
24814EN Rev E 17
Figure 14. Instrument View
Feature Description
1 Instrument Home From other views accessed from Instrument View, returns you to the Instrument
icon View.
2 Reagent Access Displays a list of available reagent access points that you can select from
Shortcut icon without having to navigate to the slide or reagent histogram.
3 Reagent icon Opens the reagent histogram where you can see details for each dispenser on
the reagent carousel.
4 Slide icon Opens the slide histogram where you can see details for each slide drawer and
real-time slide processing information for loaded slides.
5 Instrument Opens Instrument Maintenance where you can print maintenance logs and
Maintenance icon check lists, record maintenance done, and run functions to decontaminate the
instrument or clean the slide drawers.
6 Clean icon Starts an instrument cleaning cycle with one mouse click. The instrument must
be in sleep mode.
7 Slide images Displays which slide drawers are available and in use and the status of the
slides on the instrument.
8 Reagent wheel Displays which reagent slots are available and in use and the status of the
reagent dispensers on the instrument.
9 Reagent Grid icon Opens the reagent grid that displays recently scanned reagent information.
10 Instrument name Displays the instrument name and the next operator action.
11 Bulk bottles Monitor the status of bulk reagent bottles and internal reservoirs.

Feature Description
12 Waste Monitor the status of waste containers.
13 Maximum Waste Specifies the maximum fluid levels for the maximum waste containers.
Level slider
14 Slide Control Panel Operates slide drawers on the instrument.
15 Sleep button Places the instrument into sleep mode to reduce wear when not in use.
16 Ready button Pressurizes the instrument so you can load slides.
17 Running button Starts a slide run.
Reagent and Slide Histograms

Clicking the Slide or Reagent icons at the Instrument View opens the corresponding histogram. The histogram
displays processing information over time. You can mouse over a bar to see a pop-up box containing
information or double-click it to see the details. Slide Histogram details include slide data and real-time
protocol processing steps. Reagent details include product name and dates. When needed, buttons appear
below the histograms for viewing pick lists, reagent access points, and manual application lists.
Figure 15. Slide Histogram
24814EN Rev E 19
Inventory and Orders

The Inventory List and Order List make it easy to view and organize product and order information. You open
them using Global Navigation icons. Information appears in a grid made up of columns and rows. You can
reorganize the grid, sort and search for records, filter data to show only what you specify, and print standard or
custom reports of whatever is in the grid.
Figure 16. Inventory List
Steps to Staining Slides

This section summarizes the tasks in a basic staining run and tells you where to find more information about
each task. Chapter 4 gives step-by-step instructions for a basic run.
Step Reference
1 Start the system Chapter 5, Start and Stop the System, page 27
2 Refill bulk bottles Chapter 13, Remove or Replace a Bulk Bottle, page 111
3 Empty waste containers Chapter 13, Empty and Replace a Waste Container, page 115
4 Label slides Chapter 9, Create a Slide Label, page 74

Chapter 9, Apply a Slide Label, page 77
5 Get a list of required Chapter 7, Print a Reagent Pick List, page 60

reagents
6 Load reagents Chapter 11, Install and Remove Trays, page 97
7 Load slides Chapter 10, Load and Remove Slides, page 81

Chapter 4, Load Slides, page 25
8 Start the run Chapter 4, Start the Staining Run, page 26

Chapter 6, Running Mode, page 34
9 Unload completed slides Chapter 6, Operate Slide Drawers, page 37

CHAPTER 4
Perform a Staining Run
Start Up
1. Start the Ventana System Software. If the instrument is off, turn the power switch On (I=On).
2. Click the instrument name in the Instrument Bar. The
Instrument View opens, showing reagent and slide
status, bulk and waste fluid levels, and instrument
mode.
3. Click the Ready button to activate the instrument so you
can load slides. When the drawers are ready to use, their
lights turn green.
Figure 17. Instrument View Ready Button
Refill Bulk Bottles

Bottles can be removed from the instrument during a staining run. However, it is recommended that bulk fluids
be checked and refilled before the staining run begins.
Remove or Replace a Bulk Bottle

To remove a bulk bottle, press the latch
release (1) and pull the bottle out (2).
To install a bulk bottle:
1. Refill the bottle from the carboy.
2. Place the bottle in the slot and push it
forward until you feel or hear it click.
Figure 18. Bulk Bottle Connectors
Empty Waste Containers

Check the waste container icons in the software Instrument View. If necessary, empty the waste containers.
24814EN Rev E 21
4 Perform a Staining Run BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
1. Press the Lock button to unlock the waste

container, and then pull it out. The waste
container monitor on the front of the
instrument turns red.
2. Empty the container into the appropriate
waste disposal container.
3. Push the container back until it locks into
place. The waste container monitor on the
front of the instrument turns off. Figure 19. Waste Container Lock
CAUTION: Handle waste containers carefully.To avoid injury, wheel the carboy to the disposal area.
To prevent spillage, put the cap on the carboy before removing it.
Create Labels
1. At the Home View, click the Create Label button. SLS opens.
2. Click the Protocols button. The Select Slide Labels options appear.
Figure 20. Select Slide Labels Options
3. Select the label template and protocols.
Option What To Do
1 Under Label Type, click BenchMark ULTRA.
2 The default label template is displayed. You can use the default template or click the
arrow to select a different template.
3 For each label you want to print, click a protocol, and then click the Add button. The
protocols appear in the Label(s) to Print list.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 4 Perform a Staining Run
4. Click the Close/Print button. The label template appears. The first label in the list is highlighted.
Figure 21. Print a Slide Label
5. In the template, enter information to appear on the highlighted label.
Option What To Do
1 Type an accession number.
2 Click the arrow to select the type of tissue on the slide.
3 Click the arrow and select inpatient or outpatient.
4 View a list of the labels ready to be printed.
5 See a preview of the selected label before printing it.
6. Click the Print button to print the label. Repeat the same steps for each label in the list.
NOTE: If you click the Cancel or Close buttons and leave SLS, the labels will still be selected when
you return to SLS.
Apply Slide Labels

1. After the label is printed, tear it off carefully.
2. Push the transparent flap (1) over the label (2) to
seal the printed side.
3. Peel the label from the backing (3).
4. Apply the label to the frosted side of the slide.
Make sure there are no air bubbles. Figure 22. Apply a Label
24814EN Rev E 23
Print a Pick List of Required Reagents

Slide labels created in SLS appear as slide orders in the Order List. You can select the slide orders for the next
staining run and generate a pick list of the reagents required for the run.
1. In the Global Navigation, click the Orders icon.

Figure 23. Orders Icon
2. In the Order List, select the slide orders that you want a list of reagents for. To select more than one order,
CTRL click each order. To select a group of orders, SHIFT click the first and last orders in the group.
Figure 24. Order List
3. Under Actions, click the Printer button, and then select Pick
List.
4. At the confirmation message, click Yes to print the pick list.
5. The pick list opens in Print Preview. Click the Printer button
to print the pick list. Click the Close button when you are
finished. Figure 25. Print Pick List
Figure 26. Pick List in Print Preview

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 4 Perform a Staining Run
Install a Reagent Tray

1. Select the required reagents.
2. Make sure the dispensers are snapped into the holders on the tray.
3. Lift the tray from the magnetic tray holder.
4. Slip the mounting holes in the reagent tray onto the mounting studs on the carousel.
Figure 27. Dispensers in Tray Figure 28. Tray Mounting
Load Slides
1. At the Instrument View, make sure the instrument is in Ready mode. If necessary, click the Ready button.
When the instrument is ready to use, the slide drawer lights will turn green.
2. Press the Open All Available Drawers button on the instrument Slide Control Panel.
(1) Open All Available Drawers

(2) Open All Drawers with Completed Slides
(3) Close All Open Drawers
Figure 29. Slide Control Panel
3. Position slides in drawers with labels facing up and

inward. Wiggle each slide and push it down gently to
make sure it is seated on the heating pad. Both ends of
the slide are held in place by small posts.
4. Press the Close All Open Drawers button on the
instrument Slide Control Panel.
Figure 30. Seat a Slide
24814EN Rev E 25
Start the Staining Run

1. Make sure the reagent hood and all drawers are closed.
2. At the Instrument View, click the Running mode button.
You are prompted to confirm that you want to begin a
staining run.
3. The system reads the reagent and slide bar codes, calculates
the staining run time, and starts the run. During the run, the
Instrument Bar shows the countdown to run completion.
Figure 31. Run Time
Unload Completed Slides

When slides are completed, their images in the Instrument View and their drawer lights on the instrument flash
green.
1. Press the Open All Drawers with Completed Slides button on the instrument Slide Control Panel.
2. Remove the slides from the open drawers.
3. Press the Close All Open Drawers button on the instrument Slide Control Panel.
NOTE: You can print a Run Report to keep as a record of the staining run and the protocols and
reagents used. (See Print Run Reports, page 87.)
Rinse Slides and Apply Coverslips

1. After you remove the slides from the instrument, rinse them in warm soapy water to remove any remaining
reagents.
2. Dehydrate the slides as usual and apply a glass coverslip to each slide.
NOTE: If you use AEC detection procedure, do not dehydrate and clear the slides. Mount with
aqueous mounting medium.

CHAPTER 5
Start and Stop the System
About Starting and Stopping

To start the BenchMark ULTRA system, you need to turn on the computer, start the Ventana System Software,
and turn on each connected instrument. It doesn’t matter whether you start the instrument or the software first.
To shut down, you need to turn off (or put to sleep) each connected instrument, exit the Ventana System
Software, and shut down the computer. Always be sure to exit the software before you turn off the computer. It
doesn’t matter whether you stop the instrument or the software first.
Start the Ventana System Software

1. Turn on the computer.
2. At the Windows desktop, click the VENTANA
logo shortcut icon. The system splash screen Figure 32. VENTANA logo Shortcut Icon
and startup view displays.
Figure 33. Splash Screen
24814EN Rev E 27
5 Start and Stop the System BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Figure 34. Software at Startup
Start an Instrument
1. Turn on the instrument. The switch is inside the
left door below the bulk bottles. I = On. O = Off.
When the power is on, the power icon in the
Instrument Status Panel lights up.
The software starts communication with the
instrument. The instrument’s name appears in the
Instrument Bar, and its image appears in the
Home View. Its status indicators in the Instrument
Bar are green.
Figure 35. Instrument On-Off Switch
2. To put the instrument in Ready mode so you can

load slides:
• Click the instrument name in the Instrument
Bar, and
• In Instrument View, click the Ready button.
3. The green lights on its slide drawers light up and
the status indicators in the Instrument Bar are
green. You can open and close the drawers.
Figure 36. Ready Button

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 5 Start and Stop the System
Startup Modes
A summary of startup modes is provided below. For more details, see About Startup Modes, page 34.
Mode Description What You Can Do
Sleep The instrument is on, but the compressor • Open the reagent hood and install or
is not running, and slide drawers are remove reagent dispensers.
inactive and unlit. • Remove and install bulk reagents.
The instrument name shows in the • Remove and install waste
software Instrument Bar. containers.
Instruments start up in Sleep mode when • Go to the software Instrument View.
they are turned on. To save wear, an
• Change the startup mode to Ready.
instrument can be put to sleep by clicking
the Sleep button.
Ready The instrument is pressurized and • Remove and install bulk reagents.
accessible. • Remove and install reagent trays.
Status indicators in the Instrument Bar • Remove and replace waste
and slide drawer lights on the instrument containers.
are green.
• Load slides.
• Go to the software Instrument View.
• Change the startup mode to Sleep
or Running.
Running The system plans the run, locks the • Install or remove bulk reagents and
reagent hood and loaded slide drawers, unlocked waste containers.
and processes the slides.
• Go to the software Instrument View.
While the run is being compiled (before • Load slides into empty drawers.
processing begins), the reagent hood
can be opened to install or remove • Remove completed slides.
reagents. During processing the reagent • Cancel selected slides.
hood can only be opened during a • Schedule a reagent access point.
reagent access point.
Figure 37. Instrument Bar in Running Mode
Stop an Instrument
You can either turn off the instrument completely or put it to sleep. In Sleep mode, the instrument doesn’t
maintain pressure, but it starts up faster than if it is turned off completely. It also retains information about the
last reagents used and displays it in the reagent wheel in the software Instrument View and Reagent Histogram.
To put an instrument to sleep:
1. Click the instrument name in the Instrument Bar.
2. At the Instrument View, click the Sleep button.
To shut down completely, turn off the instrument On-Off switch (I=On. O=Off.)
24814EN Rev E 29
5 Start and Stop the System BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Shut Down the Software and Computer

Always exit the Ventana System Software before you turn off the computer. If necessary, you can exit the
software and shut down the computer with instruments still running. However, you won’t be able to see any
status indicators or system messages. In general, it is best to keep the software open until slide processing is
finished.
1. Click the Home button in the Global Navigation.
2. At the Home View, click the Exit button in the System panel. The system software closes and your
computer desktop appears.
3. Follow standard procedures to shut down the computer.
WARNING: To avoid damaging important VENTANA system files, always exit the software
before turning off the computer.

CHAPTER 6
Operate the Staining Instrument
Instrument Parts
(1) Reagent hood
(2) Reagent carousel
(3) Independent slide drawers
(4) Slide Control Panel
(5) VENTANA button
(6) Instrument Status Panel
(7) Bulk reagents (backed up by reservoirs)
(8) Waste containers (behind doors)
Figure 38. BenchMark ULTRA Instrument
24814EN Rev E 31
6 Operate the Staining Instrument BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Connect and Define Instruments

Use Instrument Setup to connect or disconnect instruments and assign unique names and colors to connected
instruments.
1. At the Home View, click the Instrument Setup button (gear icon) to open the Instrument Setup View.
Figure 39. Instrument Setup Button in the Home View
2. In Instrument Setup, specify the setup features for each instrument.
Figure 40. Instrument Setup View
Feature What You Can Do
1 Click the button to connect the instrument to or disconnect it from the host computer.
2 Enter or change the instrument name. The name entered here will appear on the
Instrument Bar and in the Instrument View.
3 Click the listbox arrow and select the type of instrument.
4 Click the color bar and select a color. The color selected here will appear on the
Instrument Bar and in the Instrument View.
3. To exit Instrument Seup, click the Home icon. You will be prompted to Save your changes. You can click
Yes to save the changes, No to exit without saving the changes, or Cancel to remain in Instrument Setup
without saving the current changes. The settings you save will appear in the Instrument Bar, Home View,
and Instrument View.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 6 Operate the Staining Instrument
Monitor Instrument Status

Instrument Status Panel
The Instrument Status Panel on the front of the instrument displays indicators specific to the instrument.
Figure 41. Instrument Status Panel
Feature Description
1 Waste Turns red if a container is unlocked and removed. Turns yellow

when a container is in use.
2 Bulk reagents Turns red when a bulk bottle is missing or internal reservoir space
is insufficient.
3 System error Turns red to indicate an error or problem with the instrument.
4 Reagent Access Lights up during a reagent access point.

Point
5 Power Lights up when the instrument is turned on.
Software Status Indicators

The Instrument Bar is visible from anywhere in the BenchMark ULTRA system. Indicator lights tell you the
current status of reagents, slides, bulk reagents, and waste for each connected instrument. If a manual action—
such as a reagent access point or titration—is scheduled, the corresponding icon is displayed, along with a
countdown to the scheduled time. If no other actions are scheduled, a countdown to slide completion is
displayed. The same information is displayed at the Home View, but in a graphic format.
(1) Status of reagents, slides, bulk reagents,

and waste containers.
(2) Next operator action.
(3) Time until next action.
Figure 42. Instrument Bar Indicators
24814EN Rev E 33
About Startup Modes

The instrument has three modes: Sleep, Ready, and
Running.
The mode the instrument is in determines what you
can do with it. The mode is set from the software
using Startup Mode buttons at the Instrument
View.
Figure 43. Startup Modes
Sleep Mode
In Sleep mode, the power is on and the instrument is communicating with the software, but the compressor is
off. The lights on the slide drawers are unlit, and the drawers can’t be opened. The reagent hood is unlocked,
and dispensers, bulk fluids, and waste containers can be added or removed.
There are two ways to get to Sleep mode:
1. The instrument starts up in Sleep mode when you turn on the power switch.
2. Click the Sleep button in the Instrument View. Putting the instrument to sleep when it isn’t in use reduces
wear. Typically, this is done only once a day when you are through using the instrument.
CAUTION: Before putting the instrument to sleep, make sure no slides are left in the drawers.
Ready Mode
In Ready mode, the reagent hood is unlocked, and dispensers, bulk fluids, and waste containers can be added or
removed. The slide drawers can be opened and closed to load slides. All of the slides loaded in Ready mode
will run as a batch. In batch mode, a problem with any single slide will prevent the whole batch from running
until the problem is corrected. (After the batch run begins, the instrument is in Running mode, and any slides
added will run individually.)
There are two ways to get to Ready mode:
1. Click the Ready button in the Instrument View.
2. When the instrument has completed a staining run (all slides in all drawers are completed), it waits for a
brief period, then automatically returns to Ready mode.
Running Mode
In Running mode, the system processes slides. To start Running mode, you click the Running button in the
Instrument View. Typically, this needs to be done only for the first run of the day. After the first run, the system
may return to Ready mode, but if you load more slides, it will start automatically after a short pause.
Processing Slides
When you start a run from Ready mode, the system compiles the run for the initial batch of slides. The reagent
hood and all drawers must be closed before the run will begin.

During compiling, the reagent hood and slide drawers remain unlocked. The yellow lights on the slide drawers
flash. The system checks each drawer to see if a slide is loaded. If a drawer is empty, its light turns green.
Drawers where slides are detected continue to flash yellow. If everything needed for every slide in the batch is
present, the system locks the hood and the drawers that contain slides. The yellow lights on the slide drawers
stop flashing. In a few minutes, the run starts.
If something is wrong or missing, the drawer lights flash red and the status indicators in the software
Instrument bar turn red. The hood and drawers remain unlocked. The run will not start until everything is ready
for all of the loaded slides.
Adding Slides While Running

Once the initial batch is running, you can add individual slides in any available drawers. You don’t need to
click the Running mode button again. Each slide is processed separately and has its own Run Report. Yellow
lights indicate drawers that are in use and locked, and green lights indicate drawers that can be opened and
used.
Whenever a slide drawer opens and closes, the system looks for a slide in it, checks the slide and reagent bar
codes, and plans the single slide run. During compiling, the drawer light flashes yellow. If the required reagents
are already loaded, the drawer is locked, its yellow light stops flashing, and processing begins in a few minutes.
If reagents are missing, slide processing will not start. Slide status indicators in the software and on the
instrument turn red, and messages appear in the Communicator describing what is missing. Because other
slides are already running, you can’t open the hood to add reagents. But, depending on the current protocol and
processing steps, you may be able to use a reagent access point to add the missing reagents. When the system
discovers new slides, it analyzes the situation and identifies possible reagent access points. If it finds any, it
shows them as buttons on the Slide Histogram. You can click any active reagent access point button to
schedule the corresponding pause. The slide status indicators will remain red until you actually load the
required reagents. (See Reagent Access Points, page 39.)
When Slides Are Finished

When a slide is completed, the green light on its drawer flashes. When the slide is removed, the green light
stops flashing, indicating that the drawer can be used again.
When an entire staining run is completed (all slides in all drawers are finished), the system stops and unlocks
the hood and all drawers. Green lights flash on all drawers that hold slides. When the slides are removed, the
green lights stop flashing.
24814EN Rev E 35
Start and Stop an Instrument

Start an Instrument
1. Turn on the instrument. The switch is
inside the left door below the bulk bottles.
I=On. O=Off. When the power is on, the
power icon in the Instrument Status Panel
lights up.
2. The software starts communication with the
instrument. The instrument’s name appears
in the Instrument Bar, and its image
appears in the Home View. Its status
indicators are green.
Figure 44. On-Off Switch
3. Prepare the instrument for loading slides:

• Click the instrument name or image to go to the Instrument View.
• At the Instrument View, click the Ready mode button. When the instrument is ready, the green slide
drawer lights will come on.
Stop an Instrument
You can either turn off the instrument completely or put it to sleep. In Sleep mode, the instrument may not
maintain pressurization, but it starts up faster than if you turn it off with the switch.
To shut an instrument down completely, turn its On-Off switch to Off (O).
To put an instrument to sleep, make sure all the slides have been removed, then go to Instrument View and
click the Sleep button.
Open the Reagent Hood

When the instrument is in Sleep mode or Ready mode you can open the hood freely.
When the instrument has gone from Ready mode to Running mode but has not yet started staining slides (the
yellow lights on the drawers are flashing), you can still open the hood. If you do, the compiling process must
start over from the beginning.
IMPORTANT: For efficiency and to reduce wear on the instrument, it is best to make sure all reagents
and slides are loaded before you start Running mode.
While the instrument is staining slides (the yellow lights on the drawers stop flashing), the hood automatically
locks. When all slides are completed, the slide drawers flash green and the hood is unlocked.
WARNING: Never try to force the hood open or bypass the locking system.

Operate Slide Drawers

On the Instrument
Single Drawers
1. Press the drawer control button to open the
drawer.
2. To close the drawer, press the button again.
Figure 45. Drawer Button
Groups of Drawers
Press a button on the Slide Control Panel located between drawers 15 and 16.
(1) Open all available drawers.

(2) Open all drawers with completed slides.
(3) Close all open drawers.
Figure 46. Instrument Slide Control Panel
On the Computer
Selected Drawers
2. At the Instrument View, click the slide image for
the drawer you want to operate. To select more
than one drawer, CTRL click each image.
Selected drawers are outlined.
3. Right-click any selected slide image, and then
click Open Selected or Close Selected.
Figure 47. Operate Selected Drawers
24814EN Rev E 37
Groups of Drawers
2. At the Instrument View, click a button on the software Slide Control Panel.
(1) Open all available drawers.

(2) Open all drawers with completed slides.
(3) Close all open drawers.
Figure 48. Software Slide Control Panel
Add Slides While Slides Are Running

Once the instrument is in Running mode, you can add slides without disrupting slides that are already running.
(Any required reagents must already be on the reagent carousel or you will need to schedule a reagent access
point to load them.) Available drawers are indicated by green lights. Whenever a drawer opens and closes, its
light flashes yellow. The system automatically scans it to look for a slide and incorporate it into the run. Each
slide is processed independently and has its own Run Report.
Add a Single Slide

1. Locate an available drawer (the green light is lit).
2. Press the Drawer Control button on the instrument or the Open Selected button in the software Instrument
View (see Operate Slide Drawers, page 37).
3. Load the slide and close the drawer. When staining begins, the yellow light stops flashing.
WARNING: To be detected a slide must be loaded into the drawer correctly. It should be seated
between the two posts with the label facing up and inward.
Add a Group of Slides

1. Press the Open All Available Drawers button.
2. Load the slides into the drawers you want to use.
3. Press the Close All Open Drawers button. When staining begins, the yellow lights stop flashing.
IMPORTANT: You can open and close each drawer individually, but processing starts sooner if you
close all the drawers at once.

Cancel Slides
2. At the Instrument View, click the image of the slide
you want to cancel. To select more than one slide,
CTRL click each image. Selected drawers are
outlined.
3. Right-click any selected drawer, and then click Abort
Selected.
Figure 49. Abort Selected Slides
Find a Slide on an Instrument

See Find Slides on an Instrument, page 86.
Reagent Access Points

About Reagent Access Points
You can select a reagent access point to manage your reagents on-board the instrument while slides continue to
process. If you add slides to the instrument, additional reagents may be required to complete the staining run.
The system must pause so the reagent hood can be opened to add or change dispensers.
Reagent access points are four minute windows of time when you can add or remove reagents on the reagent
carousel. The reagent access point is available when the instrument is either incubating or rinsing slides and no
reagent dispense is required for baking, deparaffinization, cell conditioning, hybridization, stringency washes,
and reagent incubation times.
When a reagent access point is selected and reached, the reagent hood and carousel automatically unlock to
allow you to open the hood. The reagent access points are automatically recalculated and updated throughout
the workday and change when new slides are added, slides complete processing, manual applications are
performed, or simply with the passage of time.
The software allows reagent access during each four minute instrument cycle where no reagent dispense is
required, therefore the availability of reagent access points will be dependent upon the mix and type of
protocols being run at any given time.
24814EN Rev E 39
When a Reagent Access Point is Reached

The lights on the slide drawers will alert you when operator action is required during a reagent access point.
Drawer LIghts Action to Take
Flash blue One minute to open the hood.
Solid Blue Three minutes to add or remove reagents on the reagent carousel.
Solid Red One minute before the hood must be closed.
IMPORTANT: If you do not close the hood, the system will continue to operate. However, if there is a
dispense step required for a slide while the hood is open, that slide will be aborted. Follow the power
fail sequence to recover the slide (refer to Remote Software, page 172).
View Status of Reagent Access Points

You can view the status of a reagent access point by checking the Reagent Access Indicator icon in the
Instrument Interaction box and the Instrument bar.
Reagent
Access
Indicator Status Description
Reagent Access A gray icon that indicates a reagent access point has been
Point Selected selected and is the next interaction with the instrument.
Hood unlocked A blue icon that indicates the reagent access point has
arrived, the hood is unlocked, and the reagent carousel
can be accessed.
You have one minute to open the hood once a reagent
access point has started.
In process A yellow icon that means the hood has been opened.
Close hood A red icon that means it is time to close the hood.
You have one minute to close the hood before the reagent
carousel sweeps back to position 1.
Reagent Access and Reagent Qualification

When you add new reagents during a reagent access point, the software will qualify each reagent based on
Expiration, Exhaustion, Kit Completeness, Ownership, Registration, Duplication, and Reagent Positioning. If
the reagent(s) pass the qualification test, the reagents will be primed if necessary and will be available for use
in subsequent staining runs. For more information about system messages for reagent access points, see
Messages and Errors, page 145.

Schedule Reagent Access Points From the Instrument View

A Reagent Access Shortcut icon is included in the icon bar in the Instrument View so you can set a reagent
access point without having to navigate to the Slide or Reagent Histogram. The reagent access icon has both a
disabled and enabled state, which is detailed in the following table.
Reagent
Access
Shortcut
Status Description
Icon
Disabled User permission for
reagent access is not
granted and/or the
reagent detect sensor
has not been installed.
Enabled User permission for
reagent access is
selected and the reagent
detect sensor has been
installed.
Figure 50. Icon Bar with Reagent Access Shortcut icon
Select a Reagent Access Time

1. In the Instrument View, click the Reagent Access Shortcut icon
to display a menu of available reagent access times. The times
are identical to the times displayed on the reagent and slide
histograms.
2. To select a desired reagent access time, click a time on the menu.
3. After you select a time, the menu will close.
4. When the reagent access point is reached, the Reagent Access
Shortcut Icon turns blue and the instrument hood unlocks. Blue
lights flash on each slide drawer and the instrument will alarm
when the reagent access sequence begins.
IMPORTANT: You have one minute to open the reagent

hood when the reagent access point begins.
Figure 51. Reagent Access

Shortcut Icon with Reagent 5. Open the reagent hood and add or remove reagents on the
Access Times reagent carousel.
CAUTION: Only open the instrument hood during a

scheduled reagent access point. Keep hands clear of hot
surfaces and moving parts.
6. When you are done, close the instrument hood. The instrument
hood locks and the reagents are scanned. The drawer lights begin
to turn off and the instrument alarm stops.
24814EN Rev E 41
View the Selected Reagent Access Time and the Reagent Pick List
1. In the Instrument View, click the Reagent Access Shortcut icon.
The selected time and a reagent pick list displays to help you
manage the reagents that need to be added and can be removed.
2. To deactivate the reagent access point, click on the button with
the red hood icon and time.
Figure 52. Selected Reagent Access Shortcut Icon with Reagent Pick List
Schedule Reagent Access Points From Slide and Reagent Histogram Views
You can view and set reagent access points from both the Slide and Reagent Histogram views. The histogram
views provide reagent access information in multiple ways and in the context of processing slides or reagent
usage.

About Histogram Blue Bands

When viewing the histogram, you
will see that there are sections of the
histogram that are medium blue and
sections that are light blue.
Figure 53. Setting Reagent Access Points from the Slide Histogram View
Corresponding buttons for medium blue

sections indicate when multiple contiguous
access points are available for selection,
and when only one reagent access point is
available.
For more information about the buttons
that appear in the Slide Histogram, see
Histogram Reagent Access Buttons.
Figure 54. Selected Reagent Access Point from Reagent Histogram View with Reagent Pick List
Description of Histogram Blue Bands

1 Medium blue sections indicate where reagent access is available.
2 Light blue sections indicate where reagent access is not available.
NOTE: Notice that the medium blue and light blue bands are not always the same size. This is because
in certain instances you will have only one reagent access point at a time, or you will have multiple
contiguous reagent access points. The size, number, and color of the sections that display depend on
the type and number of protocols being run at any given time.
3 The square button indicates when multiple contiguous access points are available for selection.
4 The round button indicates when only one reagent access point is available.
5 Once a reagent access point has been selected, a dark blue band will appear and the unselected
reagent access points will be disabled (grayed out) and a reagent pick list will be available for viewing
and printing.
24814EN Rev E 43
Histogram Reagent Access Buttons

With each medium blue band, there are corresponding buttons that indicate a reagent access point may be
selected. The following table describes the four button styles that may be present on the Reagent or Slide
Histogram to display available reagent access points.
Button Style What it tells you about an available Reagent Access Point
A round button indicates that there is only one reagent access time available.
This button only has the reagent access icon.
To view the time of the reagent access point, hover over the button.
The round button depicted displays both the reagent icon and reagent access
time.
A square button with a small down facing triangle
indicates that there is more than one reagent access
point to chose from.
Click on the button and a menu of reagent access times
will be generated.
The square button depicted displays both the reagent icon and the first reagent
access point available from a menu of reagent access times.
Select Reagent Access Point in a Histogram

1. In the Instrument View, click the Slide or Reagent icon to view a histogram.
2. In the histogram, medium blue bands indicate the available reagent access points.
3. Click a button that corresponds to a medium blue band to view a menu of the available times.
4. After you select a time, the menu will close.
5. When the reagent access point is reached, the Reagent Access Shortcut Icon turns blue and the instrument
hood unlocks. Blue lights flash on each slide drawer and the instrument will alarm when the reagent access
sequence begins.
IMPORTANT: You have one minute to open the reagent hood when the reagent access point begins.
6. Open the reagent hood and add or remove reagents on the reagent carousel.
CAUTION: Only open the instrument hood during a scheduled reagent access point. Keep hands clear
of hot surfaces and moving parts.
7. When you are done, close the instrument hood. The instrument hood locks and the reagents are scanned.
The drawer lights begin to turn off and the instrument alarm stops.
Information and Error Messages

Messages appear in the Communicator to keep you informed of what the instrument is doing and alert you to
any problems. For information on handling information and error messages, see Manage Messages, page 146.

Maintenance
Maintenance Check List
Task Daily Monthly Quarterly Reference
Wipe External Surfaces X Page 45
Pre-Run Check List X Page 45
Clean slide drawers As needed* Page 245
Rinse Bulk Fluid Containers X Page 248
Wash and Brush Slide Heating Pads X Page 248
Clean Waste Tub and Drain X Page 249
Run Slide Heater Temperature Verifiers X Page 249
Decontaminate Bulk Fluid Bottles X Page 250
Decontaminate Bulk Fluid Reservoirs X Page 250
Decontaminate the Instrument X Page 253
*Cleaning slide drawers as needed is generally done once per day, before the first run or after
the last run.
Daily Maintenance
Wipe External Surfaces
Wipe external surfaces with a soft, damp cloth.
Pre-Run Check List

1. Inspect the power cord to see that it is in good condition.
2. Fill the EZ Prep, SSC, ULTRA CC1, ULTRA CC2, Reaction Buffer, and ULTRA LCS bottles.
3. Empty the waste containers.
CAUTION: Handle filled waste containers carefully. To prevent spillage, place the cap on the carboy
before removing it from the instrument. Wheel the carboy to the disposal area instead of lifting it.
Clean Slide Drawers

Ventana recommends cleaning the slide drawers as needed. Cleaning is initiated from the Ventana System
Software by running an instrument function test. The process cleans all 30 drawers at once and takes about 12
minutes to complete. It generates about a cup of waste (240 mL) each time it runs. For more information and
instructions, see Clean Slide Drawers, page 245.
24814EN Rev E 45
Monthly and Quarterly Maintenance

See Cleaning and Maintenance, page 241.

CHAPTER 7
Manage Slide Orders
About the Order List

The Order List helps you manage slides that are being processed. You can scan the list to see which orders are
ready for processing and print a list of required reagents. You can also sort and filter orders, print a list of
orders, or create a new order and add it to the list.
Order List
To open the Order List, click the Orders icon in the Global Navigation.
Figure 55. Order List Features*
*The Order List may be missing slide specific information after the staining run has completed. All
information can be obtained from the Run Report or Case Report for these slides.
Feature Description
1 View Use Layout and Group by options to view and organize orders.
2 Reset button Reset list back to default settings.
3 Filter Create a custom filter to sort orders.
4 Quick Find by Value Find an order.
24814EN Rev E 47
7 Manage Slide Orders BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Feature Description
5 Actions Left to right: New Order, Maintenance, and Print.
6 State Key Colors used to indicate the status of slides in the State column.
7 Orders list Lists slide orders currently in the system.
8 LED On/Off Activates the blue location light on a slide drawer.
9 Records Displayed Shows the number of order records displayed in the list.
Orders Sent from an LIS

If your facility is linked to a Laboratory Information
System (LIS), check the Orders icon for pending orders
from the LIS. When new orders arrive, the Orders icon
displays a green circle with a number in it. Figure 56. Orders Received from LIS
How Orders Are Organized

The Order List organizes slides into order records and displays them in a list. Records appear in the Order List
when a slide label is printed in SLS, a new order record is created, or an order record is sent from the LIS.
The list is sorted in ascending order with the most recent orders at the top. Column headings are defined by the
slide data fields that are set when the host is configured. Some data fields are described below. For more
information about slide data fields, see Define Slide Data Fields, page 229.
Figure 57. Order Data
Column Description
Show Displays a blue button when the slide location feature is activated.
Label Appears black when a label has been printed and gray when a label has
not been printed.
Instrument Shows the instrument identification number.
Position Shows the number of the drawer the slide is in.
State Displays a color-coded status for each slide. Corresponds to the State
Key located above the list.
Protocol Number Lists the protocol number for the order and the slide label.
Protocol Name Lists the protocol name for the order and the slide label.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 7 Manage Slide Orders
Column Description
Patient Name Shows the name of the patient whose tissue is being tested.
Accession ID Lists an identifier used to track an order through the system.
Block ID Lists an identifier used to track a tissue block through the system.
Case ID Lists an identifier used to track a case through the system.
Slide ID Lists an identifier used to track a slide through the system.
Patient ID Used to identify a patient in the system.
Institution Shows the name of the institution performing the test.
Requester Lists the pathologist who requested the test.
Date of Birth Shows the date of birth of the patient.
Gender Shows the patient’s gender.
Date of Surgery Shows the patient’s date of surgery.
Anatomic Site Lists the site where a tissue sample was taken from the patient.
Surgical Procedure Lists any surgical procedure associated with the patient’s care.
Consult ID Shows the name of anyone consulted on a case.
Custom 1 and 2 Fields defined by the laboratory manager and unique to each facility.
Date Entered Shows when the order was entered into the system.
Organize the Order List

The Order List displays all orders currently in the system. You can move or resize columns, sort column data,
group orders of the same type, or filter out all orders except those you want to see.
Column Options
Use the Column Options List to sort the data in a column.
1. Right-click a column heading. The Column Options list box opens.
2. Select Sort Ascending or Sort Descending. All of the records in the list are sorted by the values in the
heading.
3. To go back to the original order, right-click the column heading again, and then select Clear Sorting.
Move or Resize Columns

To move a column, click the heading and drag it to its new location.
To resize the width of a column, move the column divider between two column headings. When a double-
headed arrow appears, click and drag the column divider.
24814EN Rev E 49
Sort Column Up or Down

Click a column heading to sort the column data in ascending or descending order. The first click sorts the
column data in ascending order. The second click sorts it in descending order. Notice a small gray arrow shows
the sort order: down means descending order and up means ascending order.
To sort multiple columns, click the first column, then SHIFT click each additional column.
Return to Default Settings

To remove any sort or search options applied to the Order List, click the Reset button. The columns return to
the original settings.
Custom Filters
You can create filters to make it easier to locate a specific order or to sort an order set.
The Order List will remember the last custom filter you applied using the Filter Builder. You can then reapply
the filter directly from the Layout menu.
Figure 58. Filter Buttons
1. To open the Filter Builder, click the Filter button (1), and then click the Customize button (2).
2. In the Filter Builder, you can either set up a new filter or open a filter you created and saved earlier. After
you select or create the filter, click the Apply button. Only the records defined in the filter remain in the
Order List.
Figure 59. Filter Builder
3. If you create a new filter click Save As, enter a name for the filter, and click Save.
4. Click the OK button to close the filter.

5. In the Layout menu, select another option, such as Printed Case Slide Orders. The grid changes to display
the new set of records.
6. To re-use the last filter applied, open the Layout menu again and select Custom.
Figure 60. Retrieve a Custom Filter
Order Maintenance
The Order List provides maintenance options so you can delete out of date or incomplete records from the list.
Because each order is a separate record, you need to delete the record and then save the changes. To restore a
record, you can cancel the changes.
Find Orders
Because the Order List shows all orders currently in the system, you will want to sort the list to view specific
orders or use the quick find feature to look up orders.
• Use the Layout and Group by options to sort orders.
• Use the Find feature to quickly search for orders.
• Right-click a column heading and select a Group by option to group order records by that column.
Find Orders by Requester

1. Under Quick Find by Value, click the Field arrow and select Requester.
2. In the Value field, type one or more letters of the requester, for example a pathologist or physician name.
You don’t have to enter an exact name. The system filters the Order List and displays the orders that match
your entries.
Sort Orders by Printed Labels

Under View, click the Layout arrow and select Printed Case Slide Orders, and then click the Group by arrow
and select No Grouping. The Order List is reorganized to show slide orders with printed slide labels. Note the
Label column shows a black (printed) label.
Sort Orders by Slide ID

Under View, click the Layout arrow and select Default-All data, no groups and then click the Group by arrow
and select Slide ID. The Order List is grouped by Slide ID. A heading identifies each group.
Sort Orders by Status and Protocol

Under View, click the Layout arrow and select Processing Case Slide Orders, and then click the Group by
arrow and select Protocol Name. The Order List is reorganized by processed slide orders and by protocol
name.
24814EN Rev E 51
Group Orders by Label

Do one of the following to select a Group by option:
• Right-click the Label column heading and select Group By This Field.
• Right-click any column heading and select Group by Box. When the black banner appears, drag and drop
the Label column heading onto it.
The system filters the Order List and groups the orders by label type: non-generated (gray) and generated
(black).
Figure 61. Orders Grouped by Label
Feature Description
1 The banner shows the column heading used to group the records. Drag and drop a
column heading onto the banner. Drag it off to remove it.
2 The header separates the first group of Label records (the non-generated group).
3 The header Separates the second group of Label records (the generated group).
Print Orders
From the Order List you can print reports, labels, or pick lists. Click the Print button, and then do any of the
following:
• Select Grid to print an order report.
• Select Label to print slide labels.
• Select Pick List to print a pick list of reagents.
• Select Screen to print a screen shot of the Order List.
Find Slides on the Instrument

You can use the LED settings in the Order List to locate a slide on the instrument.
1. Open the Order List, double-click an order to open the Order Details, and then click the Slide Data button.
2. Click the Show check box. On the instrument, a blue light glows on the drawer where the slide is located.
In the Instrument View, a dot appears below the slide image.
3. Click the Save button to keep this setting. A blue button will appear in the Show column for this order.
Click the Cancel button to remove this setting. When you are finished, click the Close button.

View Order Details

1. Open the Order List.
2. Double-click an order to open the Order Details. If the order is in process on the instrument, the Protocol
option will be selected automatically. It shows the progress of the staining protocol. Click Slide Data to see
order details.
3. Click the Close button to return to the Order List.
Create a New Order

Enter information for a new slide order. The information you enter also appears on the slide labels you can
print from the Order List.
1. Open the Order List, and then click the New Order button.
2. At the Order Detail Record, enter the slide data for the new order.
Figure 62. Order Details
Option What To Do
Label A check mark indicates that a label has been printed.
Staining Instrument After a staining run begins, this field shows the instrument name.
Slide Position After a staining run begins, this field shows the slide position number.
State Shows the status of the slide order: pending, processing, completed,
error. For new orders, pending is the default.
Protocol Number Click the look up button and choose a protocol from the Select Protocol
options. (Required)
Protocol Name If blank, choose a protocol number. The protocol name appears in this
field.
24814EN Rev E 53
Option What To Do
Patient Name Type the patient’s first and last names.
Accession ID, Block Type an identification number for each item. The ID number tracks the
ID, Case ID, Slide item through the system.
ID, Patient ID
Institution Enter the name of the facility performing the test.
Requester Enter the pathologist or physician who requested the test.
Date of Birth Click the arrow and select a date.
Gender Type the patient’s gender.
Date of Surgery Click the arrow and select a date.
Anatomic Site Type the site where the tissue sample was taken from the patient.
Surgical Procedure Enter the surgical procedure associated with the patient’s care.
Consult ID Type the identifier of a consultant on the patient case.
Custom Defined by the laboratory manager and unique to each facility.
3. In Order Details, you can do any of the following:

• To save the order, click the Save button. The Order Detail view closes and the new slide order appears
in the Order List. Click the Close button when you are finished.
• To save the order and print the slide label, click the Save and Print button. The Order Detail view
closes, the new slide order appears in the Order List, and the slide label prints.
• To close the Order Details view without saving, click the cancel button.
Change Order Information

In the Order List, you can change the order details if an order is pending and the label has not been printed.
1. Open the Order List, and then double-click an order.
2. At the Order Detail Record, click the Slide Data button and modify the information as needed.
NOTE: Slide data can’t be changed while a slide is on the staining instrument.
3. Click the Save button to confirm the changes, or click the Cancel button to exit without saving the changes.
4. Click the Close button to return to the Order List.
Create Multiple Orders

Use the Order List, Order Details, and Select Protocol views to create multiple orders, re-create an existing
order, and print labels directly from the Order List.

Order List View

In the Order List, the Maintenance button includes a Re-create option. You can select an order, then select Re-
create to create new orders using the same order details.
Figure 63. Re-create Option
Order Details View

The Order Details view accommodates multiple protocols.
Figure 64. Order Details
Feature Description
1 Protocol Number—If a single protocol is selected, the protocol number is displayed.
If multiple protocols are selected, “Multiple Protocols” is displayed.
2 Protocol Name—If a single protocol is selected, the protocol name is displayed. If
more than one protocol is selected, “Multiple Protocols” is displayed.
3 Pop-up Box—Pausing the mouse on the words “Multiple Protocols” opens the pop-
up box. It shows the first 10 protocols selected and the summary information from
the Select Protocol view.
4 • Save button—Records the orders in the Order List and closes the Order Details
view.
• Save and Print button—Records the orders in the Order List, closes the Order
Details view, and prints the slide labels.
• Cancel button—Closes the Order Details view without saving.
24814EN Rev E 55
Select Protocol View

The Select Protocol view makes it easy to select multiple protocols and review your selections. If you are
duplicating an existing order, you can record the new orders in the Order List and print the slide labels all at
once.
There are two ways to go to the Select Protocol view.
• In the Order List, select a record, then select Re-create from the Maintenance button.
• In Order Details, click the Protocol Number button.
Figure 65.Select Protocol
Feature Description
1 Quick Find By Value—Type a number to find all protocols whose names or numbers
include that number. To clear the field, press the BACKSPACE key, or select the
number and press the DELETE key.
2 Filter Options—After selecting protocols, click Display Selected to view the selected
protocols only. To return to the complete list, click Display All.
3 Protocol Number and Protocol Name—You can click the headings to sort protocols
by number or name.
4 Order Count—Click in the Order Count field to specify the number of orders to
create for each protocol. You can specify any number from 0 to 100. You can type
the number, click the up or down arrow in the count field to increase or decrease a
number, or double-click the protocol name to increase the number by 1.
5 Summary Protocols—Protocols Selected displays the number of protocols selected.
Order Count shows the total number of orders that will be created from the
selections.

Feature Description
6 • Re-create Orders button—Activated when an order count is entered for a
selected protocol. Records new orders in the Order List and closes the Select
Protocol view.
• Re-create and Print Orders button—Activated when an order count is entered for
a selected protocol. Records new orders in the Order List, closes the Select
Protocol view, and prints the slide labels.
• Clear Order Counts button—Activated when an order count is entered for a
selected protocol. Clears all order counts, clears the Quick Find By Value field,
and sets the filter to Display All.
• Selection Complete button—Activated when protocols are selected for a new
order or changed for an existing order. Transfers the protocol information to the
Order Details view and closes the Select Protocol panel.
• Cancel button—Closes the Select Protocol view without saving selections.
Create Multiple New Orders for a Patient

When you need to run several different protocols for the same patient, you only need to enter the order details
once for all the orders.
1. In the Order List, click the New Order button. The Order Details panel opens.
2. Enter the patient information in the Order Details panel.
3. Click the Protocol Number button. The Select Protocol panel opens. Click in the Order Count field and
specify the number of orders for that protocol. You can enter any number from 0 to 100. The number of
protocols selected and the total number of orders that will be created appear in the Summary at the bottom
of the panel.
4. When your selections are complete, click the Selection Complete button. The Order Details view returns.
If you selected a single protocol, the protocol number and protocol name are displayed. If you selected
multiple protocols, the words “Multiple Protocols” are displayed. Pausing the mouse on the words opens
the protocol information pop-up box.
5. In Order Details, you can do any of the following:
• Click the Save button to record the orders and return to the Order List.
• Click the Save and Print button to record the orders, print the slide labels, and return to the Order List.
• Click the Cancel button to return to the Order List without saving the orders.
IMPORTANT: Once the orders are saved, they are no longer a batch. Each order becomes a separate
record in the Order List. For the best use of the batch functions, make sure all order details are
complete before you click the Save button.
24814EN Rev E 57
Re-create an Order
If you have created an order and need to run additional protocols for the same patient, you can quickly re-create
the order for each additional protocol. The original order will not be changed.
Figure 66. Re-create Order
1. In the Order list, select the order you want to copy (1).
2. In the Actions buttons, click the Maintenance button and select Re-create (2). The Select Protocol panel
opens.
3. For each protocol you want to add, click in the Order Count field and specify the number of orders to create
for this protocol. The number of protocols selected and the total number of orders that will be created
appear in the Summary at the bottom of the panel.
IMPORTANT: Before continuing, check the summary and make sure the order count is correct.
4. When your selections are complete, you can do any of the following:
• Click the Re-create Orders button to save the new records and return to the Order List.
• Click the Re-create and Print Orders button to save the new records, print the slide labels, and return to
the Order List.
• Click the Clear Order Counts button to remove all order counts, clear the Quick Find By Option, and
set the Filter to Display All.
• Click the Cancel button to close the Select Protocol view without saving the records.
Edit an Order
To edit an existing order, double-click the record in the Order List. The new Order Details view opens without
the Order Count column. You can change patient information or select a different protocol. Click the Save
button to save your changes. Click the Cancel button to exit Order Details without saving.
Delete an Order
1. Open the Order List, and then select the order you want to delete. To select more than one order, use CTRL
click.
2. Click the Maintenance button, and then select Delete. The order record is removed from the list.
3. To save the changes, click the Save button. To cancel the deletion, click the Cancel button.

Print Reports and Labels

You can print reports, slide labels, a pick list of reagents for a staining run, or a screen using the Printer button
in the Order List.
Print an Order Report

2. In the Order List, select one or more orders to include on the report. To select multiple orders individually,
3. Click the Printer button and select Grid.
4. The system prompts you to confirm that you want to print a list of order records. Click the Yes button to
print the selected orders. Click the No button to print all orders. Click the Cancel button to exit the print
option.
5. A Print Preview window appears so you can see the report before you print it. Click the Printer button to
print the report. Click the Close button when you are finished.
Figure 67. Order Grid Print Preview
Print or Reprint Slide Labels

Slide labels are printed using the default label template set up in SLS. You can reprint a label if it was
misprinted or damaged.
1. Make sure the label printer is connected, turned on, and has sufficient label stock.
3. Select one or more orders that need labels or need to have labels reprinted. To select multiple orders
individually, CTRL click each order. To select a group of orders, SHIFT click the first and last orders in
the group.
4. Click the Printer button and select Label. A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to print
the labels. Click the No button to exit the print option.
24814EN Rev E 59
Print a Reagent Pick List

Slide labels created in SLS appear as slide orders in the Order List. You can select the slide orders for the next
staining run and generate a pick list of the reagents you need.
2. In the Order List, select the orders that you want a pick list for. To select multiple orders individually,
3. Click the Printer button and select Pick List. A confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button to print
the pick list. Click the No button to exit the print option.
4. When you click Yes, the pick list is displayed in a Print Preview window. Click the Printer button to print
the pick list. Click the Close button when you are finished.
Figure 68. Pick List of Reagents

CHAPTER 8
Create Staining Protocols
About Staining Protocols

You can automate your immunohistochemistry (IHC) and in situ hybridization (ISH) procedures by defining a
protocol. Protocols include the detection chemistry, antibody or probe, and pretreatment steps used during a
staining run. You can customize IHC, ISH, and dual staining protocols for your laboratory and edit them as
needed.
For the counterstain step, the dilution of reagent dispensed onto the slide is one part to three parts (four parts
total). Dispensers deliver 100 μl per dispense.
Instrument Protocols Option

The BenchMark ULTRA instrument and DISCOVERY ULTRA instrument use different protocols. If you have
both types of instruments connected to the host computer, you can click a button to specify which type of
protocols to display. The buttons are available wherever you need to select protocols, including the SLS Select
Slide Labels view, the Order List Select Protocols views, and all Protocols views. (In the Protocols views, the
buttons are hidden unless both types of instruments are configured.)
Figure 69. List Protocols by Instrument Type
To use the buttons go to the protocol selection view, click the appropriate button and proceed as usual.
24814EN Rev E 61
8 Create Staining Protocols BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Search, View, and Print Features in the Protocol Editor

Use the search, view, print, and zoom features in the Protocol Editor when you create and modify protocols.
Figure 70. New Protocol Editor View
Feature What It Does
1 Protocol Quick Find Filter protocols by keyword or number.
2 Find option Search protocol options by keyword.
3 Zoom dial Increase or decrease font size of the Protocol Editor View.
4 Print icon Print a full procedure or protocol summary report.
5 Select Protocol Options Display selectable protocol options in a pop-up or sidebar view.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 8 Create Staining Protocols
Selectable Protocol Options

When you create or update protocols, visual indicators identify protocol steps that are complete or that require
selectable options to be filled in. A protocol can be saved when all selected options are complete, as indicated
by a green check mark to the left of the protocol step.
Figure 71. New Selectable Protocol Options
Protocol Step Indicator What It Means
1 Green check box The protocol step is complete and the protocol can be saved.
2 Red X The protocol step has selectable options that are not complete.
3 Blue underlined text A selectable option that you can click and fill in with a specific value.
Protocol Views
The Create/Edit Protocols View provides a pop-up window or a sidebar view to display protocol options
(incubation time, temperature, reagents type, etc.) for the protocol step. One mouse click on a protocol option
activates a pop-up window that lists the available entries for the option. The pop-up window is the default
view.
24814EN Rev E 63
To use the pop-up selection window

1. In the Protocol Editor, click a blue-underlined
protocol option.
2. A pop-up window displays with a list of

available entries for the protocol option.
• Click an entry to select it.
• To change a selection in the pop-up window,
click another entry.
Figure 72. Pop up View of Protocol Selection
3. If the pop-up window has multiple options that are not visible at one time, the Find feature will allow you
to search the box by keyword.
• In the Find box, type the first few characters of a word, and then press Enter. The cursor highlights the
next instance of the word.
Figure 73. Pop up View with Find Feature
4. When you are finished with your selection, click OK to go back to the Protocol Editor View.

To use the sidebar view instead of the pop up window

• Click the check box next to the Clear button. Protocol selections display to the right of the main protocol
without obstructing the protocol editor. The Find feature in the sidebar view works the same as previously
described.
Figure 74. Sidebar View of Protocol Selections
How to Filter Protocols

Filter options in the Protocol Editor allow you to perform accelerated searches through the protocol library or
search protocols by keyword. The Protocol Filter feature provides accelerated searching through five thousand
protocols by filtering protocols from view that do not meet the filter criteria.
• Under Protocol Quick Find, in the Find box, type the first few characters of the word or number that you
want to search for. The list box shows only the protocols that contain your search criteria.
Figure 75. Protocol Quick Find in Protocol Editor
24814EN Rev E 65
How to Search Protocol Steps by Keyword

Use the Find box to do a keyword search of protocol steps. A Find box is located in the Protocol field and
within the Protocol Selections field.
• In the Find box, type the first few characters of the word or number that you want to search for. The cursor
highlights the next instance of the word in the protocol. Please note that the Find box only searches items
when they are visible on the screen.
Figure 76. Protocol Keyword Find Feature
Feature What It Does

1 The Find feature highlights the word or number you searched for.
2 Click the Find Next button to search for the next instance of the word or number.
3 Click the Find Previous button to go back to the previous instance of the word or number.
4 Click Reset to Default to remove the entries in the Find box.
How to Print from the Protocol Editor

You can print the summary or extended protocol report from the Protocol Editor.
1. Highlight a protocol in the Protocol Editor.
2. Click the Print icon at the top of the screen. The Print Protocol Report dialog box opens.
3. Click either the Full Procedure or Protocol Summary tab, and then select a protocol from the list. To select
more than one protocol at a time, hold down the CTRL key and click each protocol. Selecting multiple
protocols is especially useful when you want to print a protocol summary.
NOTE: The Protocol Full Procedure report shows all details for a protocol including steps,
reagents, and the actions the instrument performs. This report can include many pages.

4. Click the Print Report button.
Figure 77. Print Protocol from the Protocol Editor
How to Use the Zoom Feature

The Zoom feature allows you to increase or decrease the font size of the Protocol Editor View.
• Click the up or down arrows on the Zoom dial to increase or decrease the font size of the protocol. You can
zoom from 6 to 20 point font.
Figure 78. Protocol Editor with Zoom Feature
How to Scroll with the Mouse Wheel

The mouse wheel is now enabled so that you can scroll up or down within the full protocol view without
having to reposition the mouse over the scroll bar.
24814EN Rev E 67
Create and Print a Protocol

1. At the Home View, click the Protocols button, and then click Create/Edit Protocols.
Figure 79. Create a Protocol
2. You can do either of the following:

• Click a check box to add it to or remove it from the protocol.
• Click the list box arrow and select additional options.
3. Click the Save As button. The Save Protocol dialog box appears.
4. You can do either of the following:
• Type a protocol name in the Protocol box.
• Type or select a number from the Protocol Number box. When you select a protocol number, choose a
number without an asterisk. An asterisk means the number has already been assigned to a protocol.
Figure 80. Type Protocol Number
NOTE: In the Protocol Number box, you can also type digits to go to a range of numbers. For example,
if you type in 300, the list will begin at 300. The list number is incremented by each digit you enter. For
example, entering 2 will take you to the second number in the list. Entering another 2 will take you to
number 22, and so on. You can still use the scroll bar to move up and down from any point in the list.
Use the BACKSPACE key to erase the last number typed.
5. Click the Save button. To quit without saving the protocol, click the Cancel button.

6. After you save a protocol, click the Print button to print a protocol report. The Print Protocol Report
options appear.
Figure 81. Protocol Report Options
7. Click either the Full Procedure tab to print a detailed report, or the Protocol Summary tab to print a short
report.
8. Under Select Procedure, select a detection procedure from the list box.
9. Under Select a Protocol, click a protocol to select it. To select more than one, CTRL click each protocol.
Click and drag the scroll button to move up and down in the list.
10. Click the Print Report button to open the report in Print Preview. Click the Printer button to print the report
on the default printer.
Modify a Protocol
IMPORTANT: If you modify a protocol, you must also update the label that you print in the SLS. Before
you apply a label to a slide, check that the label includes the correct protocol.
1. At the Home View, click the Protocols button, and then click Create/Edit Protocols. The Protocol Editor
appears.
2. In the Procedure list box, click the list box arrow to select a detection procedure.
3. Under Protocol, click either Name or Number to indicate whether to look up the protocol by name or
number, and then select a protocol from the list box. The protocol’s definitions appear.
4. Edit the protocol by adding or removing options. Click the check box next to a step to add it to or remove
it from the protocol. Click the list box arrow to select additional options.
5. When your changes are complete, do one of the following:
• Click the Save button to keep the protocol under its current name and number.
• Click the Save As button to save the protocol under a new name and number.
• Click the Clear button to remove your changes.
NOTE: You can also print a protocol report as described in the Create and Print a Protocol section.
However, only users who are assigned the Print Protocol Reports privilege have access to the Print
button in the Protocol Editor.
24814EN Rev E 69
Delete a Protocol
1. At the Home View, click the Protocols button, and then click Manage Protocols.
2. Under Protocol(s), click a protocol to select it. To select more than one, CTRL click each protocol.
3. Click the Delete button. The system prompts you to confirm your deletions.
View Protocol Definitions

1. At the Home View, click the Protocols button, and then click View Protocols.
2. In the Select Protocol box, click Name or Number to look up a protocol, and then select a protocol from the
list box. The protocol definition appears below the selection box.
Figure 82. View Protocols
Print Protocol Steps and Details

The Protocol Summary Report is a short report that shows the steps and reagents in a protocol. The Protocol
Full Procedure report shows all details for a protocol including steps, reagents, and the actions the instrument
performs. This report can include many pages.
1. At the Home View, click the Protocols button. The Protocols options appear.
2. Click Print Protocol Reports, and then click either the Protocol Summary tab for a brief report, or the Full
Procedure tab for a long detailed report.
Figure 83. Set Up a Protocol Report
3. Under Select Procedure, choose a detection procedure from the list box.
4. Under Select a Protocol, click a protocol to select it. To select more than one, CTRL click each protocol.
5. Click the Print Report button. The report opens in Print Preview. Click the Printer button to print the report.
When you are finished, click the Close button.

Print a Protocol Usage Report

The Protocol Usage report lists the number of slides processed using a particular protocol within a specific
time period.
1. At the Home View, click the Protocols button, and then click Print Protocol Usage. The Print Protocol
Usage options appear.
Figure 84. Print a Protocol Usage Report
2. Under Select Protocol, click a protocol to select it. To select more than one, CTRL click each protocol.
3. Under Date Range, click Available Dates to print all dates that the protocol was used. To specify a
different date range, click another item in the list or click Custom, and then type the Start Date and End
Dates (or click the calendar icon to select a start or end date).
4. Click the Print Report button. The report opens in Print Preview. Click the Printer button to print the
report. When you are finished, click the Close button.
24814EN Rev E 71

CHAPTER 9
Generate Slide Labels
CAUTION: Handle slides carefully to avoid injury. Use universal precautions to avoid potential blood
borne pathogen exposure.
About Slide Labels

1) Using the small font, you can enter up to 17 characters
of your choice on this line.
2) This section of the label is used by the system for the
protocol number and bar code.
3) The last three lines of 17 characters each can be
customized. Each field can be split into two fields of
Figure 85. Slide Label Components 8 characters each. In this example, the last field is split.
Slide labels are printed using the SLS. All labels must include a bar code and a protocol name. You can add
information to the rest of the label for your own purposes.
Two font sizes are provided: small and large. The large font cannot print on the line shown above the bar code
in the figure. Maximum characters in each font are listed below.
Small Large
Characters per single line 17 15
Characters per 2-column half line 8 7
Lines above bar code 1 0
Lines below bar code 3 3
Dates displayed in split (half) fields will be formatted without separators, e.g., “Feb 8, 2000” becomes
“020800” on the label, even if the template specifies otherwise.
24814EN Rev E 73
9 Generate Slide Labels BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Label Handling
• Store labels at 22-32°C.
• Labels may be applied before deparaffinizing with solvents.
• Labels must be applied after baking or microwave treatment.
• Make sure the label does not extend past any edge of the slide.
• You can handwrite information on a label using a fine-point, permanent marking pen. Do not write on the
transparent flap.
• Do not trim the lot number section of the label. Make sure the lot number section is secured tightly to the
slide.
• Limit Xylene exposure to the minimum necessary for optimal tissue processing (15 minutes maximum).
• Do not let a coverslip overlap the label. The coverslip will not seal and will eventually fall off. Most
automated coverslip lengths are adjustable. See your user’s manual or contact the manufacturer for more
information.
Create a Slide Label

1. At the Home View, click the Create Label button.The SLS opens.
2. Click the Protocols tab. The Select Slide Labels view appears.
Figure 86. Create Slide Label
3. Select the label template and protocols.
Option What To Do
Label Type Click BenchMark ULTRA.
Select Template The default label template is displayed. If you want to use a different
template, click the list box arrow and select another label template.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 9 Generate Slide Labels
Option What To Do
Protocol List For each label you want to print, click a protocol. To select multiple
protocols, use CTRL click.
Copies Enter the number of copies to print for the selected protocol.
4. Click the Add button. The selected protocols appear in the Label(s) to Print list. To remove a protocol from
the list, select it, and then click the Remove button.
5. Click the Close/Print button. The Ventana Slide Labeling System view opens.
Figure 87. Enter Slide Label Text
6. Type the accession number and other text you want to appear on the label, and then click the Print button.
The next label moves to the top of the list. Continue entering text and printing each label until the list is
empty.
IMPORTANT: If you modify a protocol, you must also update the label that you print in the SLS. Before
you apply a label to a slide, check that the label includes the correct protocol.
24814EN Rev E 75
Create a Batch of Slide Labels

You can create a list of labels called a panel and store it in the computer. You can recall the panel later to print
the labels.
1. At the Home View, click the Create Label button. The SLS opens.
2. Click the Protocols button. The Select Slide Labels view appears.
3. Select the label template and protocols for the batch.
Option What To Do
Label Type Click BenchMark ULTRA.
Select Template The default label template is displayed. If you want to use a different
template, click the list box arrow and select another template.
Protocol List Select the protocol you want to use for the batch.
Copies Enter the number of copies to print for the selected protocol.
4. Click the Save as Panel button. The Enter Name for this Panel dialog box appears. Type a name for the
batch, and then click the Save button.
5. To print the labels, click the Close/Print button. To exit the Select Slide Labels options without printing,
click the Clear button, and then click Close/Print.
Print a Batch of Slide Labels

3. Click the Panels tab.
4. Select the name of the batch you want to print, and then click the Add button.
5. To print the labels, click the Close/Print button. The SLS opens.
empty.
NOTE: If you selected slide labels to print and then exited SLS without printing them, the labels will
remain selected until you print, remove, or clear them, or exit the VSS. If you click the Cancel or Close
button and leave SLS, the labels will still be selected when you return to SLS.
Remove a Label from the Print List

If you don’t want to print a label, you can remove it from the print list.
1. At the Home View, click the Create Label button, and then click the Protocols button in the SLS.
2. In the Labels to Print list, click the label, and then click the Remove button.

Cancel Slide Label Printing

1. At the Home View, click the Create Label button, and then click the Protocols button in the SLS.
2. Click the Cancel button to stop printing. The system returns to the SLS options but the labels are still
visible. You can choose any of the following options.
Option What To Do
Protocols button Click it to return to the Select Slide Label options.
Delete Label button Click it to delete the highlighted label from the list. The system prompts
you to verify that you want to delete the label.
Clear button Click it to remove all labels from the list and cancel printing. The system
prompts you to verify that you want to clear all labels from the list.
Print button Click it to return to the SLS and continue printing slide labels.
Close button Click it to cancel printing.
Apply a Slide Label

1. After the label is printed, tear it off carefully.
2. Push the transparent flap (1) over the label to seal
the printed side.
3. Peel the label (2) from the backing (3).
4. Apply the label to the frosted side of the slide.
Figure 88. Apply a Slide Label Make sure there are no air bubbles.
24814EN Rev E 77
Reprint Slide Labels

NOTE: To display label history, you must have the system set up to save the labels. See Specify SLS
Options, page 232.
3. Click the History tab.
Figure 89. Reprint Slide Labels
4. Select the labels you want to reprint, and then click the Add button.
5. To print the labels, click the Close/Print button. The Select Slide Labels options appear.
empty.

Print Labels from the Order List

You can print slide labels for the order records in the Order List. Slide labels are printed using the default label
template set up in the SLS.
NOTE: Before printing a label, make sure the label printer is connected to the computer, is turned on,
and has enough label stock loaded to print the labels.
1. Click the Orders button in the Global Navigation.

2. In the Order List, select one or more orders that need labels. To select multiple orders individually, CTRL
click each order. To select a group of orders, SHIFT click the group.
3. Click the Printer button and select Label from the print options list.
4. The system prompts you to confirm that you want to print the selected labels. Click the Yes button to print
labels for the selected orders. Click the No button to exit the print option.
Print Labels from the Order Details Panel

You can print slide labels when you save a new order. In the Order Details panel, enter the order details and
then click the Save and Print button to record the order and print the slide labels.
Change Label Information

In the Order List, you can change information on a label if the label is pending and has not been printed.
1. Click the Orders button in the Global Navigation. The Order List appears.
2. Double-click an order. The Order Detail record appears.
3. Click the Slide Data button and modify the information as needed.
NOTE: If a slide is loaded on the instrument, the text in the Slide Data record appears gray and you
cannot modify it.
4. Click the Save button to confirm the changes. Click the Close button to return to the Order List.
Change Case Protocol Selection

If login passwords are enabled, authorized users can change the case protocol after a label has been printed. A
setup option—Edit Case Protocol After Labeling—allows this privilege to be assigned. Follow the steps below
to grant this privilege.
1. Click the Setup button in the Home View.
2. In the Setup View, click Setup Users.
3. Select a name in the User Name list box.
4. In the Privileges column, select Edit Case Protocol After Labeling.
5. Click the Save button.
24814EN Rev E 79

CHAPTER 10
Work with Slides
CAUTION: Handle slides carefully to avoid injury. Use universal precautions to avoid potential blood
borne pathogen exposure.
About Slides
The BenchMark ULTRA instrument has 30 independent slide drawers, numbered from right to left. Slides can
be loaded in any order. Every drawer runs independently and has its own open and close button, status lights,
and independently controlled slide heater.
If there are any problems during a run, slide status indicators in the Instrument Bar turn red, and error messages
appear in the Communicator. After the problems are corrected and the messages are signed off, the run will
start again.
Load and Remove Slides

Load a Slide into a Drawer
1. Position the slide on the slide heating pad with the
label facing up and inward.
2. Gently wiggle the slide and push it down to make
sure it is seated on the pad. The ends of the slide are
held in place by small posts. (The two posts near the
outside of the drawer are not seating posts.)
Figure 90. Slide Seated in Drawer
Remove a Slide from a Drawer

1. Gently press the labeled end of the slide. The
other end lifts up.
2. Lift the slide out of the drawer.
Figure 91. Remove a Slide
24814EN Rev E 81
10 Work with Slides BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Cancel a Slide
2. At the Instrument View, click the slide you want to
cancel. The slide is outlined. To select more than
one slide, CTRL click each slide. To unselect a
slide, click it again.
3. Right-click any selected slide and select Abort
Selected. A confirmation message is displayed.
Click the Yes button to confirm the action.
Figure 92. Abort Selected Slides
Monitor Slides
Instrument Bar Status
From any software view, you can see a slide status indicator in the Instrument Bar.
Figure 93. Instrument Bar Status Indicator
Gray Green Yellow Red
Computer does not Slide drawers are Slides are being Slide error or action
detect slide drawers. idle and ready to use. processed. required.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 10 Work with Slides
Slide Details
2. At the Instrument View, stop the mouse cursor on a slide image. A pop-up box displays the slide
information.
Figure 94. Slide Information Pop-up Box
3. Double-click the slide to display its order details. The Order Details Slide Data view opens.
Figure 95. Order Details-Slide Details
4. In Order Details, click the Protocols button. While a slide is processing, protocol details show the steps in
the slide protocol, including the time each step occurs and how long it takes. Each step is represented by a
bar that fills with blue to indicate progress. Use the scroll bar on the right to scroll through the list of steps.
24814EN Rev E 83
Figure 96. Order Details—Slide Protocol
5. To return to Instrument View, click the Close button.

Slide Processing Time

2. At the Instrument View, click the Slide button at the left of the screen. The Slide Histogram opens.
3. Find the slide number in the histogram. Each horizontal bar represents a slide drawer. The bar length
corresponds to the slide processing time. The vertical blue bands to the right of the red vertical line (the
“Now marker”) indicate possible reagent access points.
4. Stop the mouse cursor on a bar to see a pop-up box with the slide information. Double-click a bar to open
the Order Details view. The information in the pop-up box and Order Details are the same as in the Slide
Details section.
Figure 97. Processing Time on the Slide Histogram
24814EN Rev E 85
Find Slides on an Instrument

When slides are running, there may be times when you need to locate a particular slide or set of slides on the
instrument. To specify which slides to locate, you go to the Order List in the Ventana System Software. The
software tells the instrument to turn on the blue lights on the specified drawers.
1. At the Home View, click the Orders button. The Order List opens.
2. Select the orders that contain the slides you want to find. To select more than one order, use CTRL click or
SHIFT click.
Figure 98. Turn On Drawer Lights
3. Click the LED On button at the bottom of the

Order List. The blue light glows on the
selected slide drawers. A dot appears below
each slide in the Instrument View.
4. To turn off the light or cancel your selection,
click the LED Off button.
Figure 99. Blue Light on Drawer

Create Slide Reports

Print Run Reports
You can print a report that lists reagents, protocols, slide data, and system messages for staining runs that ran to
completion or for stopped runs.
1. At the Home View, click the Reports button. The Reports options appear.
2. At the Reports View, click Print Run Reports, then click the Successful Runs or Stopped Runs tab. Column
headings are shown on the top line of the grid.
• The Run Number, Instrument Name, Operator, Run Start Time, Slide Position, Protocol Name, and
Protocol Number columns are included in all reports.
• The Accession ID, Case ID, and other slide data columns can be added or removed.
3. To choose columns to add to or remove from the report, click the button at the left of the Run No. column.
In the list box, click to check items to include or uncheck items to remove. When you check an item, it
immediately appears in the grid. When you uncheck an item, it immediately disappears from the grid.
When you leave the Reports View, your selections will be saved so the same columns will appear the next
time you return to Reports View.
4. Click the Include Protocol Steps box under the Successful Runs tab if you want to include protocol steps in
the report. When you click the Stopped Runs tab, the Include Protocol Steps box is automatically checked.
Figure 100. Print Run Reports
5. In the Slide Data Type to Print list box, select the slide data to appear on the report.
6. In the list of runs, click a run, and then click the Print Report button. To select more than one run, use
CTRL click or SHIFT click.
24814EN Rev E 87
7. A Print Preview window appears so you can review the report before you print it. Click the Printer button
to print the report. When you are finished, click the Close button.
Figure 101. Completed Run Report
Figure 102. Protocol Steps in a Completed Run Report
Protocol Steps in the Stopped Run Report

The Stopped Staining Run Report always includes all of the protocol steps in the run. It indicates which steps
were completed (1), points out the last step completed (2), and lists the steps that weren’t done (3).
Figure 103. Protocol Steps in Stopped Run Report

Edit Slide Data

Edit or correct errors in the slide data.
2. Click Print Run Reports. The Successful Runs tab appears.
3. In the Successful Runs list, click a staining run, and then click the Edit Slide Data button.
Figure 104. Edit Slide Data
4. In the Edit Slide Data form, click any cell, type in new data, and then click the Save button.
Design a New Case Report

You can create a Case Report that includes staining run information and slide label data. You can use the Case
Report wizard to specify the information that appears on the report.
2. Click the Print Case Reports button. A list of previously defined case reports appears.
Figure 105. Case Reports
3. Click the New Report button. The system prompts you to enter a new report name. Enter a unique name,
and then click the Save button.
4. In the Print Case Report options, design the report.
24814EN Rev E 89
Option What To Do
Date Range Select a date range for the runs to include on the report.
Selection
To enter a Custom Date Range, type a Start Date and End Date or click
the down arrow and select a date.
Primary Data Click an option to define the first category used to sort slide data.
Grouping
Secondary Data Click an option to define the second category used to sort slide data.
Grouping
Slide Data Sort Click an option used to sort the slides in a staining run.
Options
Slide Data to View Check marks indicate the options already selected. Click a check box to
select additional options.
Select which Report Select whether you want report headers, reagent, bulk, or error
Bands to Show information to print on the report.
5. The records that meet the report criteria are displayed. Do either of the following:
• Click the Print button to print the case report. A Print Preview window appears so you can review the
report before you print it. When you are finished, click the Close button.
• Click the Save Definitions button to save the report settings in the computer. The system prompts you
to verify that you want to save the report.
Print a Case Report

3. Click a report, and then click the Print button. The records that meet the report criteria appear.
4. Select the records you want to appear on the report, and then click the Print button. A Print Preview
window appears so you can review the report before you print it. When you are finished, click the Close
button.
Delete a Case Report

3. Click the report that you want to delete, and then click the Delete button. The system prompts you to verify
that you want to remove the report from the computer.

Modify a Case Report

3. Click the report that you want to modify, and then click the Next button.
4. Modify the date range, data grouping, and sort option definitions for the report.
5. When you are finished, do either of the following:
• Click the Print button to print the case report. A Print Preview window appears so you can review the
report before you print it. When you are finished, click the Close button.
• Click the Save Definitions button to save the report settings in the computer. The system prompts you
to verify that you want to save the report.
Consolidated Run Reports

The Consolidated Run Report is a report that is used to select several individual runs, which are compiled into
a single report and include system metrics, such as reagent usage, bulk usage, or system messages.
The consolidated run report can be used in multiple ways to group or display individual runs. For example, you
can choose to combine run reports to:
• Consolidate run controls with the associated patient test sample. Use the consolidate report to select
positive run control, the negative control slide of the patient sample, and the patient test sample itself. This
allows all pertinent information regarding run controls and test samples to be available on one run report.
• Consolidate runs by information type to provide customized and flexible reports. For example, you can
group reports by patient sample, requestor, test type, or protocol name, which can then be used for analysis
or reporting. As a default, protocol detail is always included.
Print Consolidated Run Reports

2. At the Reports View, click the Print Consolidated Run Reports button.
Figure 106. Print a Consolidated Run Report with User-Defined Options
24814EN Rev E 91
3. In the Options box, select the check box to include the slides that were started at the same time, which is
usually the first run of the day. The software will automatically select the other slides that were batched
together.
4. In the Include sections box, select one or more check boxes to include Reagent Usage, Bulk Usage, or
System Messages on the report.
• To deselect a report option, uncheck the box to clear it.
• In the Slide Data Type to Print list box, select the slide data to appear on the report.
5. In the Successful Runs list, select the runs that you want to consolidate into one report. To select more than
one order, use CTRL click or SHIFT click.
6. Click the Print Report button. If enabled, the Print Preview window displays so you can review the report
before you print it.
7. Click the Printer icon to print the report.
8. When you are finished, click the Close button.
Figure 107. Consolidated Completed Run Report

CHAPTER 11
Manage Reagents
About Reagents
The BenchMark ULTRA instrument holds 35 reagent dispensers in five reagent trays. Each dispenser is
labeled with a bar code. Dispensers and their contents are logged and registered in inventory, so the system
knows what is in each dispenser and how many applications are left. When a run starts, the instrument reads
the bar codes to determine which reagents are loaded. The software calculates how much of each reagent is
needed to complete the run. After the run, the system updates inventory records by subtracting the reagent used
from the starting level for each dispenser.
Status Indicators
If there are any problems during a run, the reagent status indicators in the Instrument Bar turn red and error
messages appear in the Communicator. The affected run will not start until all the required reagents are loaded
and the message is signed off.
Dispensers
Reagents may be purchased from Ventana or from other suppliers. VENTANA reagents come in plastic
dispensers. Reagents purchased from other suppliers are put into VENTANA dispensers. Each VENTANA
dispenser has a bar code label and a dispenser chamber. For use, the dispenser is snapped into a dispenser tray,
and the tray is mounted on the instrument’s reagent carousel.
Duplicate Products
More than one kit or reagent of the same type can be on the reagent carousel at the same time. The system
automatically selects which dispensers to use on each slide. Selections are based on the following rules.
• Dispensers from different kits of the same type may not be used on the same slide.
• The product that will expire soonest is used first if possible.
• If any dispenser in a kit is too low to process the next slide for that kit, the kit with the next oldest
expiration date is used. If two products have the same expiration date, the one with the fewest tests
remaining is used first.
Pick Lists
Best practice is to make sure all reagents needed for a run are loaded before you start the run. Occasionally you
might need to schedule a reagent access point to add or change reagents.
24814EN Rev E 93
11 Manage Reagents BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Manage Reagents with Ultimate Reagent Access

Use the Ultimate Reagent Access feature to manage reagents while the instrument is processing slides. Reagent
access points are four minute windows of time when the reagent hood and carousel automatically unlock and
you can add or remove reagents on the reagent carousel. The reagent access point is available when the
instrument is either incubating or rinsing slides and no reagent dispense is required for baking,
deparaffinization, cell conditioning, hybridization, stringency washes, and reagent incubation times.
The reagent access points are automatically recalculated and updated throughout the workday and can change
when new slides are added, slides complete processing, manual applications are performed, or simply with the
passage of time.
The software is designed to allow reagent access during each four minute instrument cycle where no reagent
dispense is required, therefore the availability of reagent access points will be dependent upon the mix and type
of protocols being run at any given time. For more information about reagent access points, see Reagent
Access Points, page 39. For more on selected reagent access points and pick lists, see View a Reagent Access
Pick List, page 102.
About Ultimate Reagent Access Hardware
Ultimate Reagent Access uses a reagent detect sensor that

senses the absence or presence of a reagent dispenser and
communicates the information to the barcode label reader.
Once the bar code reader knows whether or not a reagent
dispenser is in position, it either reads the barcode label or
skips the reagent position if it is empty.
Figure 108. Reagent Detect Sensor
Several hardware pieces are designed to cover hot

surfaces and minimize gaps between the instrument
moving parts.
Ultimate Reagent Access allows you to access the
reagent carousel while it continues to process slides and
slowly moves across all 30 slide positions, starting with
position one and ending at position 30.
Figure 109. Reagent Carousel Hardware
CAUTION: Only open the instrument hood during a scheduled reagent access point. Keep hands
clear of hot surfaces and moving parts.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 11 Manage Reagents
Set User Privileges for Ultimate Reagent Access

If your laboratory uses Login Passwords enabled, any laboratory personnel who will set reagent access points
will require an update to their user privileges to add the “Manage Reagent Access Points” option. For more
information, see Set Up Passwords and Log-ins, page 228 and Add a User Name and Password, page 234.
NOTE: When Login Passwords are not enabled, all users have privileges to manage reagent
access points as the default.
Set Pre-Reagent Access Alarm Warning

You have the option to set an audible alarm that notifies the lab when a reagent access point is scheduled. Labs
can choose a Pre-Reagent Access Point alarm every minute from 0-10 minutes and the instrument will sound a
short series of beeps at each minute interval. The default setting is 5 minutes.
When a Reagent Access Point is Reached

Once a reagent access point has been reached, the instrument will alert you when the reagent hood needs to be
opened to add or remove reagents and when it needs to be closed.
Reagent Access
Sequence Instrument Indicators Description
Reagent access Blue lights flash on each Over the span of one minute, the blue lights will begin to
sequence begins. slide drawer. turn off starting from slide position one and 30, moving
Instrument will alarm inward to slide positions 15 and 16. This blue light
when the hood and sequence visually alerts you to the passing of the ability
reagent carousel are to open the reagent hood over the one minute time
unlocked. period.
The instrument will alarm during the one minute time
period when the reagent hood and reagent carousel are
unlocked.
Once all the blue lights turn off, the reagent hood will
automatically lock and the reagent carousel will be
scanned.
24814EN Rev E 95
Reagent Access
Sequence Instrument Indicators Description
Reagent access Red lights flash on each After three minutes have passed and the reagent hood is
sequence ends. slide drawer. still open, one minute will remain to finish the reagent
Instrument will alarm access action and close the reagent hood.
when the hood is open. The red lights on each slide drawer will begin flashing
and will turn off starting from slide position one and 30,
moving inward to slide positions 15 and 16.
The instrument will alarm and increase in urgency during
the one minute time period when the reagent hood is
open.
When the hood is closed, the reagent hood will
automatically lock and the reagent carousel will be
scanned.
If the reagent hood is not closed prior to the end of the
close reagent hood alarm before all the red lights turn off,
the reagent carousel will sweep back to position one and
the red lights will continue to flash and the instrument will
alarm.
IMPORTANT: If you do not close the reagent hood before the one minute time period elapses, any
slides that require an immediate reagent dispense will be aborted.
If one or more reagent dispensers were added, the reagents will not be qualified until the reagent hood
is closed and the reagents are rescanned.
Load a Dispenser onto a Tray

(1) Dispenser clip
(2) Dispensing chamber
(3) Dispenser cap
(4) Cap holder
(5) Clip snapped into tray
Figure 110. Reagent Dispensers
1. Remove the dispenser cap and place it on the cap holder.

2. The dispenser is ready for use when a reagent meniscus is visible between the base and tip of the nozzle
and the dispensing chamber contains a small drop of fluid. If no reagent is visible in the nozzle area,
manually prime the dispenser by depressing the top of the barrel.
3. Snap the reagent dispenser into the reagent tray.

Install and Remove Trays

When not in use, trays holding reagent dispensers should always be stored in tray holders, and the tray holders
stored in the refrigerator. Magnets secure the tray to the holder.
Figure 111. Reagent Tray and Holder
Install a Tray
1. Lift the tray from the magnetic tray holder.
2. Make sure the dispensers are snapped into the tray.
3. If the dispensers are capped, remove the caps and place them on the dispenser cap holders.
4. Check each dispenser to see if each dispenser chamber contains a drop of reagent. If necessary, prime the
dispensers.
5. Slip the tray mounting holes onto the carousel mounting studs. Make sure the tray is settled firmly on the
carousel.
Remove a Tray
1. Lift the tray off the reagent carousel.
2. Put it in a tray holder.
3. If the tray is to be stored, replace the caps
on the dispensers and put the tray in the
refrigerator.
Figure 112. Tray Mounting Holes and Carousel Studs
IMPORTANT: Reagents should be stored in the refrigerator when not in use.
24814EN Rev E 97
Monitor Reagents
Check Reagent Status
From anywhere in the Ventana System software, you can see a reagent status indicator in the Instrument Bar.
Figure 113. Status Indicators
Gray Green Yellow Red
Dispenser slots not Dispensers loaded Dispensers loaded Dispenser is loaded,

recognized by the but not needed for and needed for the but empty, expired, or
computer. the current run. current run. otherwise invalid.
View Details in Instrument View

2. At the Instrument View, stop the mouse cursor on a dispenser slot. A pop-up box displays reagent
information.
Figure 114. Reagent Information Pop-up Box

3. For more details, double-click a dispenser slot. Product details are displayed. To return to Instrument
View, click Close.
Figure 115. Product Details
View Details in the Histogram

The Reagent Histogram gives a quick view of all reagents on the carousel, the status of each dispenser, and
how long the reagent is needed in the current run.
2. At the Instrument View, click the Reagent button at the left side of the screen. The Reagent Histogram
opens.
Figure 116. Reagent Histogram
• The vertical lines indicate time. The red vertical line marks the present time. The shaded area on the
left represents the past. The unshaded area to the right represents the future.
24814EN Rev E 99
• Each horizontal bar represents a reagent dispenser on the reagent carousel. The length of the bar
represents the amount of time the reagent is needed to finish the current run. The color of the bar
indicates the dispenser status.
• The slider above the histogram zooms the timeline from 1 hour up to 48 hours.
3. Pause the mouse cursor on a bar to open an information pop-up box.
4. For more details, double-click a bar. To return to the histogram, close the display.
5. To move the slider, click and drag it with the mouse.
6. To return to Instrument View, click the Instrument button at the left of the slider.
View and Print the Reagent Grid

You can quickly view and print reagent information using the Reagent Grid feature. This feature eliminates the
need to mouse over individual reagent dispensers on the reagent wheel. You can easily monitor and display
reagent type, tests remaining, expiration dating, and other information.
The Reagent Grid allows you to monitor and easily display which reagents are loaded onto an instrument and
how many tests are available for a given reagent. The Reagent Grid can be accessed if the instrument is in
sleep, ready, or running mode as long as the reagent carousel has been scanned at the start of a run. Each time a
new reagent is added to the wheel and scanned, the reagent grid will be updated.
1. In the Instrument View, click the Reagent Grid icon located in the center of the reagent wheel.
Figure 117. Instrument View with Reagent Grid Icon

2. A reagent grid appears that displays recently scanned reagent information.
Figure 118. Instrument View displaying the Reagent Grid with Zoom control, Reagent Wheel, and Print icon
3. Use the reagent grid features to do any of the following:

• To increase or decrease the size of the font—click the up or down arrows on the Zoom
control.
• To close the reagent grid and return to the previous view—click the Close icon.
• To print the grid, click the Print icon.

4. To view the reagent grid for the Reagent Histogram View, click the Reagent icon.
Figure 119. Reagent Histogram View with Reagent Grid View Enabled
24814EN Rev E 101

Sorting Reagent Grid Columns

With a few mouse clicks, you can sort multiple columns in a reagent grid.
• Click once on a column heading to sort data in descending order (Z to A, 9 to zero, or latest to earliest
date).
• Click on a column heading to toggle to sort data in ascending order (A to Z, zero to 9, or earliest to latest
date). Notice the arrow head in the column heading changes to indicate the sort order.
• Select multiple columns by holding down the Shift key.
Figure 120. Reagent Grid and Multiple Column Sorting
View a Reagent Access Pick List

2. At the Instrument View, click the Reagent Access Shortcut icon at the left side of the screen.
3. The selected reagent access point time and a Pick List icon displays.
Click the Pick List icon to view a list of the reagents that need to be
added and can be removed when the reagent access point is reached.
4. To deactivate the reagent access point, click on the button with the
red hood icon and time.
Figure 121. Selected Reagent Access Point at Shortcut Icon with Reagent Pick List

View Last Reagents

View Last Reagents in the Histogram
At the end of a run, all of the reagents used for the run can be seen in the Reagent Histogram. The information
remains until the next time the dispensers are scanned.
View Last Reagents in a Run Report

Reagent information also appears in the Completed Staining Run report for the latest run.
1. At the Home View, click the Reports button. The report view opens.
Figure 122. Report for Last Staining Run
2. Click the Print Run Report option at upper left of the screen.
3. Select the latest run, and then click the Print Report button.
Figure 123. View Last Reagents
Register a VENTANA Reagent

1. Click the Inventory button in the Global Navigation.
2. At the Inventory List, click the Product Registration button. The Register Ventana Products panel appears.
24814EN Rev E 103

Figure 124. Register Ventana Products Figure 125. Product Registration Probe
3. Press the product registration probe (2) against the memory button (1) on the product package. The
information from the button is copied to the Inventory List.
Figure 126. New Product in the Inventory List
NOTE: If One Touch Product Registration is disabled in the Setup Host options, the Finalize button is
activated after you apply the probe. This gives you a chance to double check the information in the
product button before recording it. To complete the registration, click Finalize. To back out, click Close.
Otherwise, the process is the same as for one-touch registration.
Register a Non-Ventana Reagent

For reagents purchased from suppliers other than Ventana, you need to log the reagent manually, register the
VENTANA container that the product will be dispensed from, and associate the product with the dispenser. For
information on how to register non-Ventana reagents, see Register Non-Ventana Products, page 199.
Manage Reagent Inventory

To look up additional information about registered reagents, use the Inventory List. You can easily search for
lot numbers or serial numbers, find which products are active or expired, or list all reagents with a specified
expiration date or number of tests remaining. You can print reports that show the same information displayed
on the Inventory List. For details, see Print Inventory Reports, page 194.

CHAPTER 12
Titrating
About Titration
Because all slide drawers work independently, manual application protocols can run at the same time as
automatic processing protocols.
When you need to do a manual application, you can use the Protocol Editor to create a titration protocol. A
titration protocol pauses the staining run at the appropriate time so you can apply antibodies to the titration
slides.
(1) The drop image shows that a titration is

scheduled. Below it is the time until
titration.
(2) Messages appear in the Communicator
when it is time for titration.
(3) Time to titration appears next to the
instrument image.
(4) The titration drop symbol appears next to
the instrument image.
Figure 127. Titration Information
24814EN Rev E 105

12 Titrating BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Create a Titration Protocol

1. At the Home View, click the Protocols button.
2. Click Create/Edit Protocols. The Protocol Editor appears.
Figure 128. Create a Titration Protocol
3. Create the steps for the titration protocol.
Option What To Do
Procedure Click the listbox arrow and select a detection procedure.
Protocol options Click a check box to add it to or remove it from the protocol. If a listbox
arrow appears, click it to select additional options, such as an incubation
time or temperature.
Titration options Click this check box so you can pipette antibodies onto a slide. Click the
listbox arrow to select additional options, such as incubation time.
Figure 129. Add a Titration Step to a Protocol
4. Click the Save As button. The Save Protocol dialog box appears.
Figure 130. Save Protocol
5. Type a protocol name, and then type or select a number from the Protocol Number box. If the protocol
number you enter is already in use, an asterisk appears next to it. You can do one of the following:
• Keep the protocol number and overwrite the protocol currently associated with it.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 12 Titrating
• Type or select a different protocol number.
NOTE: In the Protocol Number box, you can also type digits to go to a range of numbers. For example,
if you type in 300, the list will begin at 300. The list number is incremented by each digit you enter. For
example, entering 2 will take you to the second number in the list. Entering another 2 will take you to
number 22, and so on. You can still use the scroll bar to move up and down from any point in the list.
Use the BACKSPACE key to erase the last number typed.
6. Make sure the name and number are correct, and then click the Save button.
Run Titration Slides

Prepare and label your manual application slides and dilutions using standard laboratory practices. You can
print a titration label from SLS. Use the titration label template to customize the information on your labels
(see Generate Slide Labels, page 73).
Because each drawer operates individually, you can load titration slides while a batch staining run is in
progress. Best practice is to plan ahead and make sure all required reagents for the titration slides are on the
carousel before you start the batch run. Otherwise, you may need to select a reagent access point to load the
reagents. (Refer to About Reagent Access Points, page 39.)
1. Check the Instrument Bar to see if the instrument is processing slides. If you are not sure, click the
instrument name to go to the Instrument View, and then check the mode buttons.
2. Do either of the following:
• If the instrument is in Running mode or Ready mode, open an empty slide drawer, load the titration
slide, and then close the drawer.
• If the instrument is in Sleep mode, click the Ready button in the Instrument View to pressurize the
slide drawers. Open an empty slide drawer, load the titration slide, and then close the drawer.
The instrument reads the slide bar code and calculates the time to titration. If no other operator actions are
scheduled ahead of the titration, the titration icon and countdown are shown in the Instrument Bar, Home
View, and Instrument View. If other actions are scheduled before the titration, the titration information will
appear after the other actions are past.
24814EN Rev E 107

Manual Applications List

If you are processing slides that require a manual application, a Manual Application icon appears in the Slide
Histogram view. Click the icon to see a list of upcoming manual application steps.
1. Load the manual application slides and start the slide run.
Figure 131. Manual Applications Icon
2. At the Instrument View, click the Slide Histogram button. The Histogram view appears with the Manual
Application button activated.
3. Click the button to display the Manual Applications List. You can view or print the list like any other
custom report.
Figure 132. Manual Applications List.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 12 Titrating
Apply Reagent to a Slide

When it is time to apply reagent to a slide, the system notifies you by flashing the yellow light on the slide
drawer, flashing the slide image in the software, and displaying an information message in the Communicator.
Figure 133. Titration Message in Communicator
1. On the instrument, press the Open button on each slide drawer that requires titration.
2. To dispense the reagent:
• Hold the pipette at a 45° angle.
• Insert the tip so it penetrates the liquid puddle on the slide.
• Dispense gently so as not to spill reagents over the slide edges. Take care not to draw liquid from the
slide back into the pipette.
3. After all slides are completed, press the Close All Open drawers button on the instrument Slide Control
Panel and hold it for two seconds. The system will resume processing automatically shortly after the
drawer closes.
Unload Titration Slides

When the titration slides are finished, the lights on the slide drawers flash green. Press the Drawer Control
button on the slide drawer and remove the slide.
Print a Run Report

To document your titration run, you can print a staining run report.
2. Click Print Run Reports, and then click the Successful Runs tab.
3. In the Successful Runs list, notice that the Titer check box appears for titration. Click the titration you want
to print a report for, and then click the Print Report button.
Figure 134. Select a Titer Run
4. A Print Preview window appears so you can view the report before you print it. Click the Printer button to
print the report. Click the Close button when you are finished.
24814EN Rev E 109


CHAPTER 13
Prepare Bulk Products
About Bulk Products

Register each bulk fluid bottle according to the instructions in Chapter 18, Register Ventana Products, page
213.
The bulk bottles connect to the instrument using a quick-disconnect latch. A sensor behind the bottles detects
fluid levels and displays appropriate messages on the computer. If levels are too low, a warning is displayed.
Fluids are dispensed from reservoirs behind the bulk bottles, not from the bottles themselves, so you can safely
remove and replace bottles without disrupting slide processing. However, best practice is to make sure bulk
fluids are sufficient before the run begins.
Remove or Replace a Bulk Bottle

To remove a bulk bottle, press the latch
release (1) and pull the bottle out (2).
To install a bulk bottle:
1. Refill the bottle from the carboy.
2. Place the bottle in the slot and push it
forward until you feel or hear it click.
Figure 135. Bulk Bottle Connectors
Prepare Bulk Reagents

Position 1: EZ Prep
VENTANA EZ Prep comes in a 2-liter bottle at ten times the working concentration or as a prediluted solution.
The prediluted solution is used undiluted. The concentrate is diluted with deionized (DI) water to make 20
liters of solution. A 20-liter graduated carboy is supplied for diluting and storing the buffer solution. Refill the
EZ Prep bottle before each run.
To dilute the EZ Prep concentrate:
1. Make sure the spigot handle on the carboy is in the off position.
2. Fill the carboy approximately three-quarters full with DI water.
24814EN Rev E 111

13 Prepare Bulk Products BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
3. Pour the contents of a 2-liter 10x EZ Prep bottle into the carboy and swirl to mix.
4. Add DI water to fill the carboy to the 20-liter mark. Swirl to mix. If air bubbles form, wait for them to settle
before you continue.
5. Loosely screw the cap onto the carboy. If the cap is too tight, the solution will not dispense freely from the
spigot.
Position 2: ULTRA Liquid Coverslip

ULTRA Liquid Coverslip (LCS) is supplied in 2-liter bottles and used undiluted. Refill the ULTRA LCS bottle
before each run.
Position 3: SSC
SSC is used for ISH applications only.
VENTANA 10xSSC comes in a 2-liter bottle, and is five times the working concentration. The concentrate is
diluted with DI water to make ten liters of 2xSSC solution. A 20-liter graduated carboy is supplied for diluting
and storing the solution. Refill the SSC bottle before each run.
To dilute the 10xSSC concentrate:
2. Fill the carboy approximately half full with DI water.
3. Pour two of the 2-liter containers of 10xSSC concentrate into the carboy and swirl to mix.
5. Loosely screw the cap on the carboy. If the cap is too tight, the solution will not dispense freely from the
spigot.
Position 4: Reaction Buffer

VENTANA Reaction Buffer comes in a 2-liter bottle at ten times the working concentration. The concentrate is
diluted with DI water to make 20 liters of working solution. A 20-liter graduated carboy is supplied for diluting
and storing the buffer solution. To ensure proper staining, make sure the two reaction buffer bottles are refilled
from the carboy before each run.
To dilute the reaction buffer concentrate:
2. Fill the carboy approximately three-quarters full with DI water.
3. Pour the contents of a 2-liter 10x reaction buffer bottle into the carboy and swirl to mix.
5. Loosely screw the cap on the carboy. If the cap is too tight, the solution will not dispense freely from the
spigot.
6. The pH of the diluted wash should be 7.6 ± 0.2. If the pH falls outside of this range, contact the Ventana
Customer Service Center (CSC).

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 13 Prepare Bulk Products
Position 5: ULTRA CC1

ULTRA CC1 is supplied in 2-liter bottles and used undiluted. Refill the ULTRA CC1 bottle as needed.
Position 6: ULTRA CC2

ULTRA CC2 is supplied in 1-liter bottles and is used undiluted. Refill the ULTRA CC2 bottle as needed. If the
ULTRA CC2 solution is not used, the bottle must be filled with diluted reaction buffer to make the bulk fluid
system operate properly.
Position 7: Optional
The optional feature is not available at this time. This bottle must be filled with diluted reaction buffer to make
the bulk fluid system operate properly.
Manage Waste Containers

Monitor Waste Containers
At the Home View, click the instrument name or image to go to the Instrument View. The waste container
images change to represent the condition of the actual waste containers
Figure 136. Waste Level Monitor
Icon Meaning
1 No waste bottle detected.
2 Waste bottle is present and not locked or waste bottle is present and confirmed for use.
3 Waste bottle is locked, contains fluid, and is reserved for use by the instrument.
4 Waste bottle is locked, contains fluid, and is receiving fluid from the instrument
5 Waste bottle is locked, is full, and is not accepting waste fluid.
6 Waste bottle is unlocked and awaiting removal.
24814EN Rev E 113

Set Waste Container Levels

To make carboys easier to handle, authorized users can specify the maximum waste fluid levels for each
instrument. A slider in the Instrument view adjusts the maximum level to a value between 25% and 100%. At
startup, the slider will be set to the last value you specified.
IMPORTANT: A Change Maximum Waste Level privilege can be found in the Host Maintenance Setup
view. The waste level slider is visible only to users who are assigned this privilege. The slider is not
displayed when the instrument is in Testing, Service, or Decontamination mode.
Figure 137. Set Maximum Waste Level
1. Go to the Instrument view. A blue slider is displayed between the waste container images.
2. Click the slider with the mouse and drag it up or down.
IMPORTANT: The slider can be moved down only when the instrument is not in Running mode. To
reduce maximum levels, adjust the slider before you start processing slides.
3. To see the current maximum percentage, mouse over the slider.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 13 Prepare Bulk Products
Empty and Replace a Waste Container

1. Press the Lock button to unlock the waste container and pull it out. The waste indicators on the instrument
and in the software change to indicate that the bottle is absent.
2. Empty the container into the appropriate waste
disposal container.
3. Push the container back until it locks into place.
The waste indicator on the instrument turns off and
the waste image in the software changes to show
that the bottle is present.
Figure 138. Waste Container Lock
CAUTION: Handle filled waste containers carefully. To prevent spillage, place the cap on the carboy
before removing it from the instrument. Wheel the waste carboy to the disposal area instead of lifting it.
Install a Carboy Spigot

The Spigot is shipped inside the carboy.
1. Remove the spigot from inside the carboy (A).
2. Remove the cap or plug (B) from the boss or threaded (C) connector.
Figure 139. Carboy, Spigot, and Threaded Connector
3. Place the empty carboy on its back with the threaded connector facing up. (The following steps may be
easier if the carboy is placed on the floor.)
4. Place the spigot on the threaded connector (D). Make sure it is straight and turns easily.
5. Screw the spigot’s locknut until it is firm (E).
24814EN Rev E 115

Figure 140. Spigot and Locknut
6. Push the spigot down on the connector to seat the O-ring. When the spigot is seated properly, the locknut
will turn easily again.
7. Point the spout towards the bottom of the container and tighten the locknut again.
Figure 141. Spigot Handle Positions
8. Make sure the spigot handle (F) is in the off position (G) (the word “off” on the handle should be facing the
front). The carboy is now ready to use.

CHAPTER 14
Quality Control
You can use Quality Control to record information about tissue control blocks and control slides. The
information can be stored in the computer, viewed, and printed on quality control reports.
About Control Slides

Control slides are used to verify the performance of reagents and the staining system. The use of control slides
on a staining instrument is mandatory. If control slides produce inappropriate results, then the staining test
should be repeated. You use control slides to test the reagents, tissue, and staining system.
The College of American Pathologists (CAP) publishes guidelines for using control slides in its Laboratory
Accreditation Program, Anatomic Pathology Checklist. Visit www.cap.org for more information.
Managing Blocks and Control Slides

Use the Log Control Tissue function to identify tissue control blocks and the slides cut from them and save the
information in the computer. You can also deactivate blocks or slides that are no longer viable to use as
controls.
When you receive a control block in your laboratory, you can record the number of slides cut from the block,
the staining tests run on the control block, and whether the control tissue is viable. If you need to find a control
block or control slides, you can look up a control block by probe or antibody and view the number of control
slides cut, the staining test run on the control slides, and the quality control results.
When you save control block information, the system tells you whether quality control results have been
entered. If needed, print a quality control report which lists the antibody and results for the control block. For
more information, see Quality Control Reports, page 125.
24814EN Rev E 117

14 Quality Control BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Record Control Block Information

1. At the Home View, click the Quality Control button, and then click Log Control Tissue.
2. Click the Log New Control Block/Slides tab.
Figure 142. Control Block Information
3. Enter information about the control block and any control slides that were cut.
Option What To Do
Control Block Type the number or text printed on the control block.
Number
Block Accession Type the accession number associated with the control block.
Number
Block Tissue Type Enter the type of tissue embedded in the block.
Block Fixative Enter the fixation used on the tissue, if known.
Block Fixative Time Enter the length of tissue fixation.
Cut Slides Start at Enter the number that the control slides start at.
Number of Slides Record the total number of control slides that were cut.
Cut
Cut Date Select the date the control slides were cut.
Receive Date Displays today’s date as the receive date.
4. When your entries are complete, click the Receive button to save the control block information in the
computer. A message prompts you to enter quality control results.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 14 Quality Control
Log Control Slides

You can record information about the number of control slides cut from a control block.
2. Click the Log New Control Slides tab. A list of logged control blocks appears.
3. Select the block for which you want to enter control slide information.
Figure 143. Log Control Slides
4. Enter information about the control slides.
Option What To Do
Cut Slides Start at Enter the starting number.
Number of Slides Cut Enter the total number of control slides that were cut.
Cut Date Click the listbox arrow and select the date.
Receive Date Displays today’s date as the receive date.
5. When your entries are complete, click the Receive button to save the control slide information. A message
prompts you to enter quality control results.
24814EN Rev E 119

View Control Block Information

You can view information for control blocks and sort it by probe or antibody.
1. At the Home View, click the Quality Control button, and then click View Controls.
Figure 144. View Control Block Information
2. In Select Product Type, click Probes or Antibodies.

3. Under Select Probe/Antibody, click the listbox arrow and make a selection from the list. A list of the
control blocks and control slides associated with the probe or antibody appears.
View a Series of Control Slides

3. Select the control block that you want to view control slides for, and then click the View Series button. A
list of control slides recorded for the control block appears.
Figure 145. View a Series of Control Slides
4. Click the Close button to close the Series View.
Deactivate a Control Block

If you deactivate a control block, the control block information no longer appears in the Quality Control
system screens, but it continues to print on quality control reports.
3. Click the control block that you want to deactivate, and then click the Deactivate button. The system
displays a confirmation message.

Deactivate a Series of Control Slides

If you deactivate a series of control slides, the control block and its associated information no longer appear in
Quality Control system screens but continue to print on quality control reports.
3. Select the control block that you want to view control slides for, and then click the View Series button. The
series of control slides cut for the selected control block appears.
4. Click the control slide series you want to deactivate, and then click the Deactivate Series button. The
system notifies you that the slides will be deactivated and removed from the list.
Enter a Request for Control Slides

1. At the Home View, click the Quality Control button, and then click Log Cases.
2. Click the Log New Request tab.
Figure 146. Enter a Case Request
3. In the Log New Requester field, type the name of the person requesting control slides.
4. At the bottom of the screen, type the accession number of the case and enter the date you received the
request.
5. Click the Receive button to save the case request in the computer.
24814EN Rev E 121

View Control Slide Requests

2. Click the Log Cases tab. A list of requesters appears.
Figure 147. List of Cases
3. In the list, select a requester, and then click the View Cases button. A list of cases logged for the requester
appears.
Figure 148. Cases Ordered
4. Click the Close button to close the Cases view.
Deactivate a Requester Record

2. Click the Log Cases tab. A list of the requesters appears.
3. Click the record you want to deactivate, and then click the Deactivate Requester button. The system
prompts you to verify that you want to remove this requester from the list.
Deactivate Control Slide Requests

2. Click the Log Cases tab. A list of requesters appears. Click the requester that you want to deactivate control
slides for, and then click the View Cases button. A list of the case requests appears.
3. Click the case you want to remove, and then click the Deactivate button. The system prompts you to verify
that you want to remove the case.

Enter Control Results

To test the specificity of an antibody, you can stain a slide and record the results of the staining run for quality
control. You can enter quality control results for probes, antibodies, kits, reagents, bulk fluids, blocks, and
cases. You can include the instrument used for the staining run, the control block information, the antibody
used, and positive or negative staining results.
Recorded results can be used to print quality control reports and monitor control tissue to identify tissue that is
no longer viable. Quality control information is recorded for each block or antibody pair that has successful
results. You can record quality control results every time you stain a control slide with a different antibody.
You can also associate control slides with patient slides, by case and accession number, and enter quality
control results for tests run on patient tissue. Enter Case Quality Control to report quality control by accession
number, ordering physician, or category.
Select a Staining Run

1. At the Home View, click the Quality Control button, and then click Enter Control Results. A list of
staining runs appears, arranged in descending order by date.
Figure 149. Select a Staining Run
2. Select the staining run, and then click the Select Run button.
Enter and Print Results

Record quality control results for the selected staining run.
1. After you select a staining run, the Enter Control Results options appear.
Figure 150. Enter Quality Control Results
24814EN Rev E 123

2. Enter Quality Control results, as described below.
Option What To Do
QC Result tabs Click the tab for the type of results you are entering.
Selected Run list Shows the staining run you are recording results for.
Select Antibody (or Record quality control results for the selection.
other product)
Enter Control Slide Select the control block and control slide number and record staining
Data information and comments.
3. When your entries are complete, do any of the following:

• Click the Approve button if the product is approved for future use.
• Click the Reject button if the product is rejected for future use.
• Click the Retry button if the staining run will be repeated.
4. After you enter quality control results, click the Print button. The Print Quality Control Reports form
opens.
Figure 151. Print Quality Control Results
5. Click a tab for the type of report you want to print.

6. Select a date range for the report.
7. Click the Print Report button. A Print Preview window appears so you can view the report before you print
it. Click the Printer button to print the report, or click the Close button to exit Print Preview.

Quality Control Reports

Report Description
Cases Quality Prints a list of slides grouped by requester, and within requester by
Control Report accession number, ordering physician, or category.
Antibodies Quality Lists the receive date, antibody lot number, manufacturer, catalog
Control Report number, concentration, serial number, and expiration date.
Probes Quality Shows when probes were entered into Inventory and if quality control
Control Report results were entered.
Dispensed Reagent Lists the receive date, lot number, serial number, and expiration date of
Quality Control Log reagents from Inventory.
Kits Quality Control Prints the receive date, lot number, serial number, and expiration date
Report of kits logged into Inventory.
Bulk Quality Control Shows when bulks were entered into Inventory and if quality control
Report results were entered.
Block Quality Control Shows the status of each block sorted by antibody and validation of
Report control blocks.
Slide Quality Control Titled “Antigen Activity Failure of Control Slide Series,” this report lists
Report each slide that was rejected during case quality control, with the slide
number (from a cut series) and information about the slide. You can
also sort this report by ordering physician and accession number.
Print a Quality Control Report

1. At the Home View, click the Quality Control button.
2. Click the tab for the kind of report you want to print.
3. Click an item in the Selection list, or click the Select All button to choose all items in the list. To remove
selections from the list, click the Clear Selections button.
Figure 152. Quality Control Report
4. Under Select Range, do any of the following to choose the date range for the report:
• Click Available Dates to print all dates for that item.
• Click any other option and notice the entries in the Start and End Date fields are updated.
• Click Custom and enter the start and end dates you want for the report.
24814EN Rev E 125

5. Under Dates Used, select the dates to use for the report: the date when the item was received or the date
when quality control results were entered.
6. Click the Print Report button. A Print Preview window appears so you can review the report before you
print it. Click the Printer button to print the report, or click the Closed button to exit Print Preview.

CHAPTER 15
Reports
This chapter shows examples of the reports available in the Ventana System Software and explains how to use
Print Preview. You can find instructions for specific reports in the chapters where they apply.
NOTE: Before printing a report, make sure the report printer is connected to the computer, is turned
on, and has enough paper to print the report.
Case Report
For instructions on how to generate this report, see Create Slide Reports, page 87.
Figure 153. Case Report
Contact Reports
For instructions on how to generate these reports, see Manage Contacts, page 237.
24814EN Rev E 127

15 Reports BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Contact List
Figure 154. Contact List
Contact Form
Figure 155. Contact Form
Daily Maintenance Log

For instructions on generating maintenance logs, see Print User Maintenance Logs, page 243.
Figure 156. Daily Maintenance Log

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 15 Reports
Inventory Reports
For instructions on how to generate inventory reports, see Print Inventory Reports, page 208.
Inventory Report
Figure 157. Inventory Report
Inventory Product Usage
Figure 158. Inventory Product Usage
24814EN Rev E 129

Inventory Detail Usage Report for Dispensers
Figure 159. Detail Usage Report for Dispensers
Inventory Detail Usage Report for Vials
Figure 160. Detail Usage Report for Vials

Inventory Detail Usage Report for Bulks
Figure 161. Detail Usage Report for Bulks
24814EN Rev E 131

Reagent Access Point Pick List

This report can be generated from the Instrument View when a reagent access point is scheduled. For
instructions, see Chapter 11, View a Reagent Access Pick List.
Figure 162. Reagent Access Point Pick List
Manual Application List

This report can be generated from the Slide Histogram when a manual application is scheduled. For
instructions, see Manual Applications List, page 108.
Figure 163. Manual Application List
Order List Reports

For instructions on how to generate these reports, see Print Reports and Labels, page 59.
Order Grid
Figure 164. Order Grid

Pick List for Selected Orders

This report can be generated from the Order List. For instructions, see Print a Reagent Pick List, page 60.
Figure 165. Selected Orders Pick List
Protocol Reports
For instructions on how to generate these reports, see Create Staining Protocols, page 61.
Protocol Report
Figure 166. Full Procedure Protocol Report
Protocol Summary Report
Figure 167. Protocol Summary Report
24814EN Rev E 133

Protocol Usage Report
Figure 168. Protocol Usage Report
Quality Control Reports

For instructions on how to generate these reports, see Quality Control Reports, page 125.
Case Control Report
Figure 169. Case Control Report
Antibody QC Report
Figure 170. Antibody Q.C. Report

Probe QC Report
Figure 171. Probes Q.C. Report
Dispensed Reagent QC Report
Figure 172. Dispensed Reagent Q.C. Report
Kit QC Report
Figure 173. Kit Q.C. Report
24814EN Rev E 135

Bulk QC Report
Figure 174. Bulk Q.C. Report
Control Block QC Report
Figure 175. Block Report
Slide Series QC Report
Figure 176. Antigen Activity Failure of Control Slide Series

Staining Run Reports

For instructions on how to generate these reports, see Create Slide Reports, page 87.
Run Report Messages and Reagent Access

Reagent access points will be displayed on the instrument run report. If Login Passwords are enabled, the
user’s name that was logged in at the time the reagent access point was set will be displayed on the Run Report.
Figure 177. Reagent Access traceability on Instrument Run Report.
24814EN Rev E 137

Completed Staining Run Report
Figure 178. Completed Staining Run Report
Stopped Staining Run Report
Figure 179. Stopped Staining Run Report

Consolidated Completed Staining Run Report
Figure 180. Consolidated Completed Staining Run Report
24814EN Rev E 139

Print Preview
In Print Preview, you can view reports before printing them.
Figure 181. Print Preview
Feature Description
1 Printer Set Up Click to specify another printer on the network or the number of
copies to print.
2 Printer Click to print the report on the default printer.
3 Page Size Click to change the page size or magnification of a page on the
Print Preview screen.The selections are from left to right: fit the
report to the computer screen, increase the page width, or view at
100% magnification.
4 Magnification Type a number to increase or decrease magnification.
5 Page number Click the arrows to page through a report or type a page number to
go to.

CHAPTER 16
Label Printer
About the Printer

The BenchMark ULTRA system uses the E-bar II printer to print slide labels. The printer is connected to the
computer by a cable. Use the SLS to create a customized slide label template for your facility. For more
information about designing slide labels, see Customization, page 265.
The E-bar II printer prints at selectable speeds of 1.5, 2.0, and 3.0 inches per second. Text and bar codes can be
printed in any of four directions. The printer uses roll labels and a thermal transfer ribbon. It produces a
consistent, high quality image by melting a wax-based ink from a ribbon directly onto the label. After each
label is printed, the ribbon advances past the used section so that each label uses a fresh part of the ribbon.
Set Up the Printer

1. Set the printer on a flat, secure surface.
(1) USB port

(2) Centronics
(3) RS-232
(4) Power switch
(5) Power cable
(6) Power supply
(7) Plug
(8) Feed button
(9) LED indicator
Figure 182. Label Printer Setup
2. Make sure the power switch (4) is OFF.

3. Connect the printer to the computer with the appropriate cable (1, 2, or 3).
4. Plug the power cable (5) into the power supply connector in the back of the printer.
5. Plug the power cable into a properly grounded receptacle (7).
24814EN Rev E 141

16 Label Printer BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
6. Press and hold the feed button (8) while you turn on the power switch. The LED (9) will turn orange and
then red.
7. When the LED turns red, release the feed button. The printer will feed labels and calibrate the sensor. The
LED will turn from orange to red.
Load a Label Roll

(1) Top cover
(2) Ribbon access window
(3) Label spindle tab
(4) Label spindle
(5) Labels
(6) Plastic roller
(7) Paper guides
(8) Rubber roller
(9) Metal bar
(10)Top release lever
(11)Ribbon supply spindle
(12)Front and rear ribbon spindle mounts
(13)Ribbon
Figure 183. Printer Parts
1. Pull the levers (9) on each side toward the front of the printer and lift the top cover slowly until it passes the
first stop position (see the diagram where the cover hinge meets the printer case).
2. Remove the label spindle (4) from the spindle mounts.
3. Slide a roll of VMSI labels onto the label spindle. Make sure the label orientation and roll unwind direction
are correct.
4. Slide the label spindle tabs (3) onto the label spindle. Use the scale marks on the label spindle to center the
label roll and the tabs.
5. Place the label spindle and label roll into the label spindle mounts so that the labels roll from the top of the
roll, not the bottom.
6. Thread the roll of labels, label side up, under the plastic roller (6), between the paper guides (7), and over
the rubber roller (8) and the metal bar (9).
7. Adjust the paper guides so that they touch the edges of the label roll.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 16 Label Printer
8. Close the printer top cover by lifting the cover all the way up, then closing it slowly. Do not let the top
cover free fall or force it closed.
Load a Ribbon
1. Push down on the ribbon access window (2) to unlock, open, and raise it.
2. Slide a ribbon onto the ribbon supply
spindle (11) so that the ribbon will roll from
the bottom. Center the ribbon on the metal
roll part of the ribbon supply spindle.
3. Slide a ribbon rewind paper core onto the
ribbon spindle.
4. Fit the ribbon supply spindle on the rear
mounts (12). Figure 184. Printer Ribbon and Spindle
5. Pull the top-cover release levers (10) to open the printer top cover (1). Lift the top cover slowly until it
passes the first stop position (see the diagram in the printer case next to the cover hinge). The ribbon
should hang freely from the ribbon supply spindle toward the label roll (5).
6. Guide the ribbon over the plastic roller (7), rubber
roller (8), and metal bar (9).
7. Close the printer top cover by lifting the cover all
the way up, then closing it slowly. Do not let the top
cover free fall nor force it closed.
8. Place the ribbon rewind paper core on the front
hubs (10), then attach the ribbon to the ribbon
rewind paper core with tape.
9. Rotate the ribbon rewind paper core by hand until it
is thoroughly and firmly encompassed by the black
section of the ribbon, then close the ribbon access
window.
Figure 185. Printer Ribbon Installed
Update SLS for New Label Roll or Ribbon

When you load a new label roll or label ribbon onto the label printer, you need to update the SLS options. The
computer tracks and calculates the number of labels left on the roll or ribbon.
1. At the Home View, click the Setup button. The Setup options appear.
2. Click the Setup Host button, and then click the SLS Options tab.
24814EN Rev E 143

16 Label Printer BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Figure 186. Update Label Roll or Ribbon
3. Do one of the following:

• When you add a new label roll, click New 520 label roll.
• When you add a new label ribbon, click either New 2500 label ribbon or New 8100 label ribbon,
depending on the product you use.
4. Enter the date the new label roll or ribbon was loaded onto the printer.
Clean the Printer

Clean the printer head whenever you install a new ribbon.
1. Let the printer head cool for one minute.
2. Wipe the print element with a cleaning swab.
3. Rotate the roller while wiping it with 70% alcohol and a cleaning swab or lint free cloth.

CHAPTER 17
Messages and Errors
About the Communicator

The Communicator displays informational and error messages related to the instrument, reagents, or slides. If
no instrument is selected, messages are displayed for all connected instruments. When you click the name of an
instrument in the Instrument Bar (or its image in the Home View), only messages for that instrument are
displayed.
Figure 187. View Messages for All Instruments
Messages in the Communicator use different symbols and require different actions.
Figure 188. Message Types
(1) Information only; no sign-off required.

(2) Warning about the instrument or staining run.
(3) Critical error that affects the instrument or staining run and includes a Sign Off check box. The system
waits 5 minutes for the sign off before the staining run is aborted.
(4) Click to record comments about a critical error before you sign off. The comments and message appear in
the System Messages section of the Run Report.
(5) Click to sign off on a critical error message. The message is removed from the Communicator, but will be
included in the Run Report
Messages appear in descending order (most current to oldest) and include a time and date. You can resize the
Communicator to expand or shrink the window.
Figure 189. Resize the Communicator
24814EN Rev E 145

17 Messages and Errors BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Manage Messages
Sign off on a Critical Error
When a critical error message is displayed, a Sign Off button appears next to the message. A critical error
requires immediate action. The message stays on the screen until you click the Sign Off button. If the message
is not signed off within 5 minutes, the staining run is aborted.
1. In the Communicator, read the text of the error message to determine which instrument encountered a
problem and take any corrective action.
2. Click the Sign Off check box. The message is removed from the Communicator.
Add Comments for a Critical Error

1. In the Communicator, click the Comment icon. The Comment/Sign Off form opens.
Figure 190. Error Message Comments
2. Type your comments, and then click the Sign Off button.
3. Click the Ok button to close the form.
If a Fatal Error Occurs

If a fatal error occurs, processing stops. Record the error class and number (e.g., 2-5) of the error message, and
then call Ventana Customer Service Center (CSC) and report the error.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 17 Messages and Errors
Message Classes
Messages are identified by a class number and a message number within the class. The class number identifies
the type of message.
Class Message Type Class Message Type
1 Hasp Key 9 Reagent Database
2 Product Registration 10 Printing
3 Communication with the Instrument 11 Communication Port
4 Serial Numbers 12 Remote Software
5 Software Application 13 Instrument Tray Scan
6 Run Compilation 14 Staining Run
7 Database 99 Database Table Repair
8 Database Access
24814EN Rev E 147

HASP Key
Class No. Message Description What To Do
1 2 The Date/Time was out of The Time and Date in the Contact Ventana.
range and could not be HASP key are not within
stored, Reenter. 24 hours of each other
when the software starts
up.
1 3 Hardware key missing The HASP key is attached Contact Ventana.

from back of host but HASP drivers have not
computer. been registered by the
operating system.
1 4 Error encountered reading Software can’t start Contact Ventana.

hardware key. because the data from the
HASP key can’t be read
during startup.
1 6 Error encountered reading Unable to update the Contact Ventana.

hardware key. database version within
the HASP key.
1 8 Error in setting System Unable to update the OS Contact Ventana.

Time from Hasp Key. Time and Date from the
HASP key.
1 9 Time in the hardware key Unable to detect clock Contact Ventana.

is not advancing! Contact movement from the HASP
Ventana for a replacement. key.
1 10 Hardware key missing The HASP key is not Contact Ventana.

from back of host attached to the Host
computer. computer.
1 11 Error encountered reading Unable to retrieve the Contact Ventana.

hardware key. database version from the
database version field in
the HASP Key.
1 12 Error encountered reading Unable to retrieve the Contact Ventana.

hardware key. database version from the
database version field in
the HASP Key.

Product Registration
2 1 Bad Touch Memory Button Unable to retrieve data Contact Ventana.

from the touch memory
button.
2 2 Data Retrieval Error Error when retrieving data Contact Ventana.

from the touch memory
button.
2 3 Seal has already been The touch memory button Contact Ventana.
burned by another NexES has been registered by
Host %d. (%d being a Host another Host system.
ID value)
2 4 Seal was burned by this The touch memory button Contact Ventana.
NexES system too long has been registered for
ago. more than 10 days and
user is attempting to re-
register it.
2 5 The touch memory has The touch memory button Contact Ventana.
been changed after has been changed after
reading its contents. the contents have been
read, but not burned.
2 6 Reed-Solomon error Occurs when the Reed- Contact Ventana.

correction applied Solomon code correction is
successfully or failed applied while a touch
memory button is being
read.
24814EN Rev E 149

Communication with the Instrument

3 1 Communication failure The remote code form was Try the download
attempting to upgrade closed before the again. If it still fails,
software, Retry. download was completed. contact Ventana.
3 3 The new staining The remote code Try the download

instrument software was checksum does not match again, if it still fails,
not loaded correctly, Retry. the checksum returned contact Ventana.
from the staining
instrument, preventing
switching to the current
version of remote software.
3 4 Instrument Not Run is terminated because Contact Ventana.

Communicating, Run the host is unable to
Terminated. communicate with the
instrument before
downloading run
information.
3 6 Bulk Fluid System not The host is unable to Make sure the
communicating. Check communicate with the instrument is turned
power and cable. Automatic Fluidics System on and connected to
before starting a run. the computer.
3 7 Invalid or Missing Serial The User Maintenance Log Make sure the
Number! Please, turn on is opened and no serial instrument is turned
the staining module to numbers have been on and connected to
acquire its Serial Number. obtained from the the computer.
connected instrument.
If the problem persists
contact Ventana.
3 8 Button wand could not be System is unable to Check the cable

detected. You will not be communicate with the between the Probe
able to register products. product registration probe and the PC.
Please check the through the serial port.
connections! If the problem persists
contact Ventana.
3 9 Button wand software is An invalid touch memory Contact Ventana.

wrong version. You will not DLL is detected.
be able to register
products. Please notify
Ventana.
3 10 Invalid Host Command Software detects and logs Contact Ventana.

an error if a host message
command is not
acknowledged by the
remote software.

3 11 Invalid Format of Host Software detects and logs Contact Ventana.

Command an error if a host message
command is not formatted
correctly for the remote
software.
3 12 Failed to open com port Communication port could Contact Ventana.

%d (%d represents port not be opened for
number). Error number %d communications to the
(%d represents error) remote device.
3 13 Failed to setup buffer Unable to initialize the Contact Ventana.

sizes. Error number %d communications
(%d represents error) parameters for a
communications device.
3 14 Failed to Set Com States. Unable to configure a Contact Ventana.

Error number %d (%d communications device
represents error) according to the
specifications in a device
control block.
3 15 Failed to Set Com Unable to set the time-out Contact Ventana.

Timeouts. Error number parameters for all read and
%d (%d represents error) write operations on a
specified communications
device.
3 16 Failed to Set RTS. Error Unable to set the Request Contact Ventana.
number %d (%d to Send signal.
represents error)
3 17 Failed to Set DTR. Error Unable to set the Data Contact Ventana.
number %d (%d Terminal Ready signal.
represents error)
3 18 Message timed out. Command on instrument Power loss on the

Address: %0:d Host did not return within the set instrument while the
Command: %1:s ( %2:d ) time limit. host software is
milliseconds: %3:d' running can cause
this. Contact Ventana.
3 19 Unknown Tagged Value. Tag values sent from Host Contact Ventana.
Identifier: %0:d [ %1:d ] PC not defined on
Instrument Remote Code.
24814EN Rev E 151

Serial Numbers
4 2 %0:s is not a valid Staining An invalid serial number for Contact Ventana.
Instrument serial number. the staining instrument is
(%0:s represents version detected.
number) Call Ventana
technical support before
starting another run on this
Staining Instrument

Software Application
5 2 Slide number is invalid, Slide count entered did not Verify slide count.
Please Re-enter. reflect number of slides Clean off bar codes if
read on the instrument. needed. Retry.
5 3 One or more of the You have not checked off Complete the actions
checklist questions have the required boxes on the in the list, then check
not been checked. pre-run checklist. the boxes.
5 6 The Starting Date is An invalid start date is Enter a valid start

invalid! entered for the Product date.
Usage Report.
5 7 The Ending Date is invalid! An invalid ending date is Enter a valid ending
entered for the Product date.
Usage Report.
5 8 The Ending Date precedes The ending date entered Reenter dates.
Starting Date! for the Product Usage
Report is earlier than the
start date.
5 10 At least one Staining No instruments are Make sure at least

Instrument must be connected to the host. one instrument is
connected. connected to the host.
5 17 You must select at least No product was selected Select a product.

one product! on the Product Usage
form.
5 18 Product usage is No records are found for Enter a valid date

unavailable for specified the date range selected for range.
dates. Try a different the Product Usage Report.
selection criterion.
5 26 Bulk: %s has already been The bulk product you are Enter a unique bulk
registered (%s represents logging has already been name.
Bulk Name) registered.
5 41 Block: %s has already The control tissue you are Enter a unique control
been registered (%s logging has already been block.
represents Block Number) registered.
5 58 Enter a valid Antibody The antibody name is left Enter the antibody
Name blank when logging fillable name.
antibodies.
5 58 Enter a valid name of an The manufacturer name is Enter the

Antibody Manufacturer. left blank when logging manufacturer name.
fillable antibodies.
24814EN Rev E 153

5 58 Antibody: %s has already The antibody you are Enter a unique

been registered (%s logging has already been antibody.
represents Antibody registered.
Name)
5 64 The following AFM bottles The listed bulk fluid bottles Fill the bottles or if you
are not full: [list]. Proceed on the instrument are not are sure you have
Anyway? full when you start a run. enough for the run,
click Yes to proceed.
5 65 Waste level is too high. The waste space available Empty the container.
Please empty it. is insufficient for the run.
5 67 Please close the staining Staining Module door is Close door and retry.
module door and try again. open.
5 79 This series overlaps a The starting point for a Enter a different

series that has already series of cut control slides starting point.
been received. overlaps the starting point
of another series.
5 81 The following Automated The bulk fluid bottles are Fill the listed bottles or
Fluidics Instrument bottles not full when starting a test click 'Yes' to proceed.
are not full: [list]. Proceed function.
Anyway?
5 82 Case: %s has already The case you are logging Enter a unique case.
been registered for %s (%s has already been
represents Case Number) registered.
5 86 Invalid Date Range! Dates Date range is invalid. Enter a valid date
must be between January range.
1, 1997 and the current
date. The start date must
not be after the end date.
5 88 Waste level is too high. The waste bottle is full Empty the waste
Please empty it. when a test function is container.
started.
5 101 Dispenser Usage is not Cleaning Kits for SS do not Cleaning Kits are not
available for Special Stains have a saved history. available showing kit
Cleaning Kits. components.

5 102 The Archive Procedure Archive process failed to Make sure no staining
has failed. Existing system complete. runs are in progress
data is still intact. then repeat the
archive process.
If the problem
persists, Contact
Ventana.
5 108 Staining module is in an An unauthorized remote Contact Ventana.

invalid state. response message NAK is
received from the remote
software while attempting
to change the staining
instrument personality.
5 108 The Response code you An unauthorized remote Contact Ventana.

entered was invalid. response message NAK is
received from the remote
software while attempting
to change the staining
instrument personality.
Authorization Code was
invalid.
5 111 The Archive Procedure The archive process was Perform archive
canceled. Existing system canceled by the User. process again.
data is still intact.
5 117 The Starting Date is An invalid start date is Enter a valid start
invalid! entered for the Bulk Usage date.
Report.
5 118 The Ending Date is invalid! An invalid ending date is Enter a valid ending
entered for the Bulk Usage date.
Report.
5 119 The Ending Date precedes The ending date specified Enter valid dates.
Starting Date! for the Bulk Usage Report
is earlier than starting date.
24814EN Rev E 155

Run Compilation
6 1 Rule operand: XXXXXX This should not normally This could indicate
only valid in a recipe step. occur. database corruption
or an internal software
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 2 Rule operand argument: This should not normally This could indicate
XXXXX missing from occur. database corruption
Argument database. or an internal software
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 3 Rule operand: XXXX This should not normally This could indicate
missing from Argument occur. database corruption
database. or an internal software
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 4 Rule operator: %s missing This should not normally This could indicate
from Argument database. occur. database corruption
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 5 Rule action: XXXX missing This should not normally This could indicate
from Argument database. occur. database corruption
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 6 Rule action argument: %s This should not normally This could indicate
missing from Argument occur. database corruption
database. or an internal software
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 7 Rule block: %s has no This should not normally This could indicate
rules. occur. database corruption
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 8 Rule block name cannot be This should not normally This could indicate
blank. occur. database corruption
error.Contact
Ventana.
6 9 Argument: %0:s of type: The Arguments database This could indicate

%1:s missing from table does not contain the database corruption
argument database. (%0:s argument record for the or an internal software
represents the macro) defined macro step. error. Contact
Ventana.

6 10 Invalid program step: %s An invalid macro step is This could indicate

(%s represents the macro identified during the run database corruption
step name) compilation process. or an internal software
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 11 Macro step: %s not in The required macro step is This could indicate
macro function database. not included in the database corruption
(%s represents the macro MacroFunc database or an internal software
function name) table. error. Contact
Ventana.
6 12 Error processing sub An invalid sub macro step This could indicate
macro: %s (%s represents is detected during the run database corruption
the sub macro name) compilation process. or an internal software
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 16 Macro function: %s is not An invalid macro function This could indicate

valid in a macro. (%s is detected. database corruption
represents the macro or an internal software
function name) error. Contact
Ventana.
6 17 Could not locate macro An argument record does This could indicate
step argument: %s in the not exist for the required database corruption
ARGUMENT database. macro step. or an internal software
(%s represents the macro error. Contact
step argument) Ventana.
6 18 Could not locate macro A macro function record This could indicate
step: %s in the does not exist for the database corruption
MACRFUNC database. required macro step. or an internal software
(%s represents the macro error. Contact
step name) Ventana.
6 19 Sub macro: %s is missing A macro step record does This could indicate
from macro step database. not exist for the required database corruption
(%s represents the sub sub macro step. or an internal software
macro step name) error. Contact
Ventana.
6 20 Sub macro name cannot This should not normally This could indicate
be blank.. occur. database corruption
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 21 Invalid incubation time: %s The defined incubation Reprogram

(%s represents the time does not exist in the protocol(s) to use
incubation time) Arguments database. valid incubation times.
24814EN Rev E 157

6 22 Maximum staining run The number of macro This error should not
macros exceeded steps for the staining run normally occur.
exceed the limit of macro Contact Ventana.
steps that can be executed
by the remote software.
6 23 No slides found to run Attempting to load This should not

protocols from barcodes normally occur. It
and no slide barcode could indicate an
records exist in the internal software error
Barcodes table. or an error in the Bar
Codes database.
6 24 Invalid number of slides to The number of slide This should not

run: %d (%d represents barcode records for a normally occur. It
the number of barcode staining instrument could indicate a
records) exceeds the maximum problem in the Bar
number of slide positions Codes database or
on the instrument. that multiple protocols
have the same
number in the
Protocol database.
6 25 Protocol for slide position # The slide barcode record Make sure a protocol
%d unassigned. (%d does not have a protocol is defined for the bar
represents the barcode associated to the barcode. code on that slide.
position)
6 26 Protocol for slide position # A recipe is not associated Reprogram the

%d has no recipe to the protocol associated reported protocol.
assigned. (%d represents to the barcode.
the barcode position)
6 27 Invalid slide position # %d. The slide barcode position This should not
(%d represents the identified in the barcode normally occur. This
barcode position) record is outside the could indicate
minimum (1) and database corruption
maximum (30) number of or an internal software
slide positions. error.
6 28 Error allocating memory for Not enough memory to This should normally
Protocol item. create protocol item. not happen. Contact
Ventana.
6 29 Too many Protocol items. Number of Protocol Items This should normally
is greater than the not happen. Contact
maximum allowable recipe Ventana.
steps.

6 30 Invalid reagent position # The reagent barcode This should not

%d. (%d represents the position identified in the normally occur. This
barcode position) barcode record is outside could indicate
the minimum (1) and database corruption
maximum (35) number of or an internal software
reagent positions. error.
6 31 Reagent missing in The reagent needed for Ensure that the

Argument database, the staining run is not in dispenser has been
product code: %d. (%d the Argument database. registered into the
represents the reagent NexES software.
product code)
6 32 %0:s dispenser # %1:d The reagent data needed Ensure that the
missing from Dispenser for a reagent dispenser dispenser has been
database. (%0:s loaded on the reagent registered into the
represents the reagent carousel is not in the NexES software.
name and %1:d represents Dispense database.
the reagent serial number)
6 33 Recipe %s missing. (%s There are no recipes This may occur if a

represents the protocol associated with the software supplement
recipe) protocol to be executed for had been installed
the staining run. which delivered new
recipes for which
protocols were
created.
6 34 Recipe step constructor Error constructing Recipe This should normally

not assigned. Step constructor not happen. Contact
Ventana
6 35 Recipe step destructor not Error constructing Recipe This should normally
assigned. Step destructor not happen. Contact
Ventana
6 36 Recipe rule constructor not Error constructing Recipe This should normally
assigned. Step Rule Constructor not happen. Contact
Ventana
6 37 Recipe step constructor/ Recipe Step Constructor or This should normally

destructor %s has no Destructor has no steps. not happen. Contact
macro steps. Ventana.
6 38 Error allocating memory for Not enough memory to This should normally
Recipe step. create recipe step. not happen. Contact
Ventana.
24814EN Rev E 159

6 39 Too many Recipe steps. There are too many steps Contact Ventana.
in one of the Recipes
(Procedures) you are
attempting to run.
6 40 Recipe %s has non- The recipe steps are not in This could indicate
consecutive steps in it. (%s sequential order when database corruption
represents the recipe loading recipe steps during or an internal software
name) the run compilation error. Contact
process. Ventana.
6 41 Recipe %0:s has an invalid The recipe step is This could indicate
recipe step # %1:d. (%0:s determined to be invalid database corruption
represents the recipe during the run compilation or an internal software
name and %1:d represents process. error. Contact
the step number) Ventana.
6 42 Recipe %s has no steps. The recipe used during the This could indicate
(%s represents the recipe run compilation process database corruption
name) has no recipe steps or an internal software
associated with it. error. Contact
Ventana.
6 43 Recipe step %s is missing Recipe step error This could indicate

in the Function file. database corruption
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 44 Missing Recipe Function: Recipe function not Contact Ventana.

%s. installed.
6 45 Internal error processing Internal error compiling Resave protocols and

recipe step %0:s, in recipe staining run. restart the run.
%1:s.
6 46 Protocol step missing for Protocol missing step - Contact Ventana.

required recipe step %0:s, should not occur.
in protocol #%1:d.
6 47 Protocols in run are Protocols cannot Contact Ventana.

incompatible with each synchronize
other.
6 48 Protocol #%d has a blank Internal error compiling Check protocol

reagent name. staining run. options and resave.
6 49 Recipe %0:s Step #%1:d Internal error compiling Contact Ventana.

has a blank reagent name. staining run.

6 50 Unbalanced manual Incompatible timing with Check protocols and

application or titration Titration slides and Non- slides to make them
protocols. Titration slides. compatible.
6 51 Macro step %0:s has an The macro step function is This could indicate
invalid macro function outside a valid range (0 to database corruption
number: %1:d (%0:s 162). or an internal software
represents the macro step error. Contact
name and %1:d represents Ventana.
the macro step function
number)
6 52 Macro step %s has no The MacrFunc database This could indicate

match in the macro table does not contain the database corruption
function database. (%s a record that matches the or an internal software
represents the macro step macro step. error. Contact
name) Ventana.
6 53 Unexpected macro step in Invalid Macro. Contact Ventana.

macro block %s.
6 54 Function %s has no macro Invalid Recipe Function. Contact Ventana.

steps, required by all non-
sync steps.
6 55 Missing argument for When compiling macros This could indicate

Function %s. (%s for a staining run, the database corruption
represents the macro macro function does not or an internal software
function) have an associated error. Contact
argument in the Argument Ventana.
database table.
6 56 Macro %s is missing in the Compiling sub macros for This could indicate
Macros file. (%s a staining run and the sub database corruption
represents the sub macro macro is not included in or an internal software
name) the Macros database table. error. Contact
Ventana.
6 57 Error processing sub Error generating sub- Contact Ventana,

macro: %s. macro.
6 58 Maximum staining run size The run contains too many A limited number of
exceeded. steps for the staining steps can be
module to perform. downloaded to an
instrument in a run.
Report the message
to Ventana, including
the protocols in the
run.
24814EN Rev E 161

6 59 Function : %0:s contains An invalid function is This could indicate

function # %1:d, which is identified in the staining database corruption
invalid in a recipe sync procedure sync step. or an internal software
step. (%0:s represents the error.
function name and %1:d
represents the macro step
function number)
6 62 Could not locate argument: When computing the This could indicate
%0:s of type: %1:s in the constructor steps, an database corruption
argument database. (%0:s argument is missing from or an internal software
represents the macro step the database. error.
argument and %1:s
represents the argument
type)
6 63 Could not locate macro When computing the This could indicate
function: %s in the macro constructor steps, a macro database corruption
function database. (%s function is missing from the or an internal software
represents the macro step MacrFunc database table. error.
name)
6 64 Temperature setpoint The macro steps for an Contact Ventana.

missing. active case slide are being
processed and the
temperature setpoint has
not been defined.
6 65 Recipe step: %0:s contains Computing macro steps for This could indicate
function # %1:d which is an active case slide and an database corruption
invalid in a recipe step. invalid macro function is or an internal software
(%0:s represents the identified in a staining error.
recipe step name and procedure step
%1:d represents the macro
step function number)
6 66 Dispenser %0:s, # %1:d A reagent dispenser Locate the dispenser

missing from tray. (%0:s needed for the staining run reported by this error
represents the reagent is not on the reagent and place it on the
dispenser and %1:d carousel. reagent carousel.
represents the serial
number)
6 67 Not enough of reagent %s The reagent on the Place another

to perform run. (%s carousel does not have dispenser of the
represents the reagent) enough tests remaining to reported reagent on
stain the slides that are the reagent carousel.
loaded on the instrument
6 68 Reagent %s missing from A reagent needed for the Put the missing
tray. (%s represents the staining run is not on the reagent on the
reagent) reagent carousel. carousel and restart
the run.

6 69 Dispensers %0:s, # %1:d Reagents required to be in Make sure the

and %2:s, # %3:d must be a specific order are not dispensers noted in
beside each other. (%0:s loaded on the reagent the error message are
represents the reagent carousel in the proper beside each other.
name, %1:d represents the order. Restart the run.
reagent serial number,
%2:s represents the
reagent name, and %3:d
represents the reagent
serial number)
6 70 Errors in recipe constructor Error creating rule block. This could indicate
rule block : %s. database corruption
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 71 Errors in recipe sync rule Error creating recipe This could indicate
block : %s synchronization rules. database corruption
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 72 Macro 0 generating object Compiling the macro 0 and This could indicate
not ready to start now. the staining instrument is database corruption
not a valid type. or an internal software
error. Contact
Ventana.
6 73 Invalid instrument id (%s). Compiling the macro 0 and This should not
(%s represents the the staining instrument is normally occur.
instrument ID) not a valid type. Restart the instrument
and the host
computer.
6 74 Blank instrument name The macro 0 is being Ensure that the

compiled and the staining instrument name is
instrument does not have a assigned and is non-
defined instrument name. blank. Restart the run.
6 75 Duplicate %0:s # %1:d Qualifying reagents for a Remove the reagent

dispensers on tray. (%0:s staining run and more than with the duplicate
represents the reagent one reagent on the reagent product code and
name and %1:d represents carousel have the same serial number.
the product code) product code and serial
number.
6 76 Error loading temperature Temperature groups could Contact Ventana.

arguments. not be obtained from
Arguments table.
6 77 Error loading incubation Incubation groups could Contact Ventana.

arguments. not be obtained from
Arguments table.
24814EN Rev E 163

6 78 Dispenser x, Serial #y has A reagent on the carousel Replace it with a valid

expired and can not be has expired. reagent.
used in this run.
6 78 %0:s, Serial # %1:d is Loading reagent data to Load a reagent that is

owned by host %2:d and compile a staining run and registered on the
can not be used in this run. the reagent is owned by current host.
(%0:s represents the another host system.
reagent name, %1:d
serial number, and %2:d
owner)
6 78 Dispenser with Product Loading reagent data to Load a reagent that is

Code %0:d, Serial # %1:d compile a staining run and registered on the
is owned by host %2:d and the reagent is owned by current host.
not found in Products another host system and
Table (%0:d represents the not in the dispense
reagent product code, database.
%1:d represents the
reagent serial number, and
%2:d represents the
reagent owner)
6 78 %0:s, Serial # %1:d has Loading reagent data to Load a reagent that is
expired and can not be compile a staining run and registered on the
used in this run. (%0:s the reagent has expired. current host.
name and %1:d represents
6 78 Dispenser with Product Loading reagent data to Load a valid reagent.

Code %0:d, Serial # %1:d compile a staining run and
has expired and not found the reagent has expired
in Products Table (%0:d and is not in the dispense
represents the reagent database.
product code and %1:d
serial number)
6 78 %0:s, Serial # %1:d has Loading reagent data to Load a valid reagent.
been Deactivated and can compile a staining run and
not be used in this run. the reagent has been
(%0:s represents the deactivated.
reagent name and %1:d
serial number)


has been Deactivated and the reagent has been
not found in Products deactivated and not in the
Table (%0:d represents the dispense database.
reagent product code and
%1:d represents the
reagent serial number)
6 78 %0:s, Serial # %1:d has no Loading reagent data to Load a valid reagent.
reagent in it and can not be compile a staining run and
used in this run. (%0:s the reagent has no tests
represents the reagent remaining.

has no reagent in it and not the reagent has no tests
found in Products Table remaining and is not in the
(%0:d represents the dispense database.
reagent product code and
%1:d represents the
6 78 %0:s, Serial # %1:d is not Loading reagent data to Load a valid reagent.
enabled for this instrument compile a staining run and
type and can not be used the reagent has no
in this run. (%0:s argument record in the
represents the reagent argument database.

is not enabled for this the reagent has no
instrument type and not argument record in the
found in Products Table argument database and is
(%0:d represents the not in the dispense
reagent product code and database.
%1:d represents the
6 79 %0:s, Serial # %1:d is Loading reagent data to Load a valid reagent.

currently in use on another compile a staining run and
instrument (%0:s the reagent is on another
represents the reagent staining instrument.
24814EN Rev E 165


is currently in use on the reagent is on another
another instrument (%0:d staining instrument.
product code and %1:d
serial number)
6 80 Protocol # %d has more Compiling a staining run Correct the protocol.

than %d reagents in one and finds a protocol has
recipe step. (%d more than 2 reagents
represents the protocol defined for a staining
number and the second procedure step.
%d represents the
maximum reagents per
recipe step)
6 81 Macro function: %s is Processing sub macros Contact Ventana.

restricted in this type of and the sub macro has
macro (%s represents the restricted steps.
macro function name)
6 83 Unknown recipe sync step Processing the staining Contact Ventana.

: %s (%s represents the procedure sync steps and
function name) the sync step is of an
unknown type.
6 86 Recipe %0:s has an invalid The recipe function is not Contact Ventana.
recipe step #%1:d. valid for this instrument.
6 87 Manual application Selected Reagent Access Select a different

conflicts with the selected Point is not compatible with Reagent Access
Reagent Access Point, the manual application Point, or let the slide
slide run will be slides. run continue.
reattempted in %0:d
minutes.
6 88 Dispense conflicts with the A dispense operation Select a different

selected Reagent Access conflicts with the selected Reagent Access
Point, slide run will be Reagent Access Point. Point.
reattempted in %0:d
minutes.
6 89 Procedure steps are not Invalid procedure steps. Contact Ventana.

allowed in front of the Pre-
Wet Slide sync step.
6 90 Expected but did not find a Invalid procedure steps. Contact Ventana.
Pre-Wet Slide sync step.
6 91 Found more than one Pre- Invalid procedure steps. Contact Ventana.
Wet Slide sync step.

Database
7 1 %s has no associated Attempting to deactivate Contact Ventana.

cases. (%s represents cases and no records
Case order name) exist.
7 4 This dispenser is owned by Preparing to refill a Wait for the other Host
another host and cannot dispenser and the system to relinquish
be filled at this time. dispenser is owned by ownership.
another Host system.
Force ownership via
access code from
Ventana.
Contact Ventana if the
problem persists.
7 5 This dispenser is in use on Preparing to refill a Wait for the other

an instrument and cannot dispenser and the NexES Host system
be filled at this time dispenser is being used in to relinquish
a staining run. ownership.
Contact Ventana if the
problem persists.
7 6 Product usage data Attempting to generate a Product has not been

unavailable! Product Usage report and used. There is no data
no data is available. to be reported.
7 7 There are no pre- Attempting to log cases Set up the requestors.

registered requesters wen no case order
requesters are set up.
7 13 There are no pre- Attempting to log bulk Contact Ventana.

registered bulks products and no pre-
registered consumables
are available.
7 14 There are no pre- Attempting to log probe Contact Ventana.

registered probes and no pre-registered
probes are available.
7 15 There are no pre- Attempting to log reagents Contact Ventana.

registered reagents and no pre-registered
reagents are available.
7 16 There are no pre- Attempting to log control Contact Ventana.

registered blocks tissue when no pre-
registered control tissue is
available.
7 17 There are no Active Attempting to refill a Register new

dispensers to fill dispensers when no active dispensers.
dispensers are available.
24814EN Rev E 167

7 18 There are no pre- No pre-registered Contact Ventana.

registered antibodies antibodies are available
and attempting to log
antibodies.
7 19 There are no runs to QC at An attempt is made to Enter the control

this time enter control results, and results when there are
there are no executed executed staining
staining runs. runs.
7 21 Backup was cancelled User cancels the backup Do the backup again.
prior to completion before it is completed.
7 24 Incorrect Frequency in The maintenance Select the correct

User Maintenance Notes frequency is not Daily, frequency.
Monthly, or Quarterly.
7 27 Inventory Database is An attempt is made to Register product into

Empty generate an Inventory inventory.
report, and there are no
product records in the
inventory database.
7 48 Database Integrity Error: An error is encountered Contact Ventana.

%s (%s represents data while performing a
integrity error message) database integrity check.
7 58 There is no system data to There is no staining run There is no system

archive data for the selected data to archive.
archive date.
7 59 All staining run(s) must be Attempting to perform an All staining run(s)

complete before archive while a staining run must be complete
performing an archive is in progress. before performing an
archive.
7 60 There are no runs to print Attempting to print a run Change the date
at this time report and no data is range or cancel the
available for the selected report.
date range.
7 61 No tests were run with this Attempting to print a Choose another

dispenser dispenser usage report dispenser or cancel
and the dispenser has not the report.
been used in a staining
run.
7 63 No runs have used this Attempting to print a bulk Choose another

bulk fluid usage report and the bulk product or cancel the
product has not been used report.
in a staining run.

7 64 There were no runs which Attempting to print a bulk Change the date
used bulk in the date range usage report and the bulk range.
selected product has not been used
in a staining run.
7 66 Keycode allocation failed. No keycodes are available Delete unused

Delete unused Keycodes within the allocated keycodes.
from Manage Keycodes. keycode range and
Change range of
Press [Abort] to abort print attempting to print a case
keycode allocation.
job. Press [Ignore] to slide label with keycoding
generate a standard activated.
protocol barcode
7 67 Arguments table missing Initializing the staining Contact Ventana.

Numeric Constants for instrument and the
button hysteresis hysteresis value for the
slide button is not in the
Argument database.

values for slide button IO instrument and the I/O
point ID point identifier value for the
slide button is not in the
Argument database.

Numeric Constants for instrument and the
slide heater PWM period hysteresis value for the
slide heater PWM period is
not in the Argument
database.

entry for slide heater IO instrument and the I/O
point ID point identifier value for the
slide heater PWM period is
not in the Argument
database.
7 68 Arguments table missing Initializing the host Contact Ventana.

Numeric Constant : Ultra configuration settings and
Waste mls Per Inch the Ultra Waste mls Per
Inch value is not in the
Argument database.
7 68 Arguments table missing Initializing the host Contact Ventana.

Numeric Constant : Ultra configuration settings and
Waste Bottle Volume the Ultra Waste Bottle
Volume value is not in the
Argument database.
24814EN Rev E 169

Database Access
8 3 Both a Last and a First Attempting to save contact Re-enter data.

Name are required information and the first or
last name is blank.
8 6 File can not be opened, The Host application is Contact Ventana.

Call Ventana unable to open an
encrypted database table.
8 7 Failed to Encrypt "%s" The Host application is Contact Ventana.

table with Archive unable to re-encrypt a
Password (%s represents database table with a
database table name) NexES Archive encryption
during the archive process.
8 8 Failed to copy tables to The NexES application Contact Ventana.

temporary folder fails to copy database
tables to a temporary
directory during the archive
process.
8 9 Failed to copy tables from The NexES application Contact Ventana.

temporary folder fails to copy database
tables from a temporary
directory to the
NexES\Data directory
8 10 Error Deleting Runs The NexES application Contact Ventana.

fails to remove staining run
data during the archive
process.
8 12 Error Deleting Dispensers The NexES application Contact Ventana.

fails to remove dispense
data during the archive
process.
8 15 Could not locate Kit Unable to locate the kit Contact Ventana.
Dispensers in table dispensers when
attempting to add or
change reagent
comments.
8 15 Could not gain ownership Unable to gain ownership Contact Ventana.

of Dispenser(s) of a reagent from another
Host system when
attempting to add or
change reagent comments
for the kit.
8 37 Error Packing Table Unable to optimize the Contact Ventana.

database tables during the
archive process.

8 43 Error Deleting Cases Unable to delete case Contact Ventana.

requesters from the
database during the
archive process.
8 45 Error Deleting Blocks Unable to delete tissue Contact Ventana.

blocks from the database
Reagent Database
9 1 Probe: %s has already Logging a 3rd party probe Contact Ventana.

been registered (%s and the probe has already
represents probe name) been registered in the Host
system.
9 2 Reagent: %s has already Logging a 3rd party reagent Contact Ventana.

been registered (%s and the reagent has
represents reagent name) already been registered in
the Host system.
9 4 %s is an invalid bulk The bulk reagent being Contact Ventana.

product, contact Ventana received is not a valid bulk
(%s represents reagent product.
name)
9 6 Can not proceed with A staining run is started Register the product,
staining run at this time. and no bulk reagents are associate it with the
You must register the registered and associated instrument, and start
following product(s) before with the instrument. the staining run.
proceeding
Printing
10 2 There are no contacts You try to print a Contact Set up the contacts.
recorded report and there are no
contacts set up in the
Ventana software.
24814EN Rev E 171

Communication Port
11 1 Com Port Error (Message Failed to initialize or utilize Check connections

varies) the com port for instrument and retry. Contact
communications. Ventana if the issue
persists.
Remote Software
12 0 Staining instrument The staining run Remove the slides.

program ran to completion completes.
12 1 Invalid step found in Invalid step found in Run Contact Ventana.

RunStarting macro. Call for start macro.
service.
12 2 Invalid step found in Invalid step found in Run Contact Ventana.

RunEnding macro. Call for end macro.
service.
12 3 Reagent cover lid was The reagent cover lid lock This should not
opened during the run has been overridden and happen. If it does,
the lid opened while slides close the lid within 5
are in process. If the minutes and sign off
problem is corrected within the error message.
5 minutes, the run will Otherwise, slides in
continue. After that, any process will be
slides started before the aborted.
error occurred will be
aborted. Run reports for
affected slides will include
the error information.
12 5 Low pressure too low The low pressure falls Contact Ventana.
below the low pressure low
limit.
12 6 Low pressure too high The low pressure exceeds Contact Ventana.
the low pressure high limit.
12 10 Power failed during run The power to the Contact Ventana.

instrument is cut off during
a staining run.
12 11 Slide heat exceeded the A slide heater on the Contact Ventana.

absolute maximum instrument exceeds the
temperature. maximum allowable
temperature.
12 12 Slide heat temperature A slide heater sensor on Contact Ventana.

sensor is bad or not the instrument cannot be
connected. detected.

12 15 Pressure exceeded The low pressure exceeds Contact Ventana.

absolute maximum limit the low pressure maximum
allowable limit for a
specified amount of time.
12 16 Nozzle plate failed to find The home sensor fails to Contact Ventana.
home position detect during the homing
of the nozzle plate.
12 17 Reagent tray failed to find The home sensor fails to Contact Ventana.
home position detect during the homing
of the reagent tray
carousel.
12 19 Fluid in tub exceeded The excess fluid level Contact Ventana.

maximum level exceeds the sensor level
located on the internal tub.
12 23 User aborted run before The User ends a staining Contact Ventana.
normal completion run prior to its natural
completion.
12 24 Nozzle plate position The nozzle plate becomes Contact Ventana.

incorrect during the run misaligned.
12 25 Reagent tray position The reagent carousel Contact Ventana.

incorrect during the run becomes misaligned.
12 26 Reagent Access is Operator left the hood Follow proper

incomplete. Failure to open past the 4 minute Reagent Access
dispense a reagent window. Slides missed procedures.
resulted in aborting the scheduled dispenses.
slide
12 35 SS Wash reservoir failed to High float did not hit when Check sensors, check
prime. trying to prime the bulk for clogs in tubing.
fluid.
12 37 Depar reservoir failed to High float did not hit when Check sensors, check
prime. trying to prime the bulk for clogs in tubing
fluid.
12 39 Probe Wash reservoir High float did not hit when Check sensors, check
failed to prime. trying to prime the bulk for clogs in tubing
fluid
12 43 SS Wash reservoir failed to High float did not hit in Check sensors, check
recharge itself in time. allotted time limit when for clogs in tubing.
trying to prime the bulk
fluid.
12 45 Depar reservoir failed to High float did not hit in Check sensors, check
recharge itself in time. allotted time limit when for clogs in tubing.
trying to prime the bulk
fluid.
24814EN Rev E 173

12 47 Probe Wash reservoir High float did not hit in Check sensors, check
failed to recharge itself in allotted time limit when for clogs in tubing.
time. trying to prime the bulk
fluid.
12 53 Nozzle plate check at end The nozzle plate is slightly Contact Ventana.
of run indicated minor out of alignment.
misalignment
12 54 Nozzle plate check at end The nozzle plate is Contact Ventana.

of run indicated major seriously out of alignment.
misalignment.
12 55 Reagent tray check at end The reagent tray is slightly Contact Ventana.
of run indicated minor out of alignment.
misalignment.
12 56 Reagent tray check at end The reagent tray is Contact Ventana.

of run indicated major seriously out of alignment.
misalignment.
12 57 Syringe pump error. Check Syringe pump did not Check pump integrity.
the audit trail for details. respond as expected. Check connections.
12 60 Cleaning operation A cleaning function has Go to the next step in

completed. completed. the cleaning operation
or resume using the
instrument.
12 63 Run stopped due to Slide drawer heaters are Contact Ventana.

heater(s) abnormally hot. If too hot for slide
this situation persists, call processing.
for service.
12 65 High pressure exceeded The high pressure exceeds Contact Ventana.

the maximum allowable
limit for a specified amount
of time.
12 66 Pressure trap full The pressure trap high Contact Ventana.

level float sensor is
activated.
12 67 Slide #1 offline The slide position for the Contact Ventana.

requested operation is
offline.

offline.

offline.


offline.

offline.

offline.

offline.

offline.

offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
24814EN Rev E 175

offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
offline.
12 97 Nozzle plate offline The nozzle plate is not Contact Ventana.

responding to commands.

12 97 Nozzle plate offline The nozzle plate is not Contact Ventana.

12 98 AFM drawer offline The ARM drawer is not Contact Ventana.

12 99 AFM left offline The AFM left board is not Contact Ventana.
12 99 AFM control board is not The AFM control board is Contact Ventana.
responding normally to not responding to
commands. If this situation commands.
persists, call for service.
12 100 AFM right offline The AFM right board is not Contact Ventana.
12 101 Reagent cover lid open too The instrument cover was Delays can affect
long during Landing Zone left open too long after a slide processing.
landing zone. The system Check the Run
waits until the lid is closed, Report, evaluate the
and then resumes the run. impact of the delay,
The error is listed in the and take appropriate
Run Report. action.
12 102 Exhaust fan failure The exhaust fan is not Contact Ventana.
operating properly.
12 103 Instrument task hang The instrument crashes Contact Ventana.

due to a task hang.
12 104 Locked bottle now A previously locked waste Make sure waste
undetected container is now missing. containers are in
place.
12 105 No waste bottle available There is no waste Make sure waste

container available for use containers are in
by the system place.
12 106 High pressure too low The high pressure falls Contact Ventana.
below the high pressure
low limit.
12 107 High pressure too high The high pressure exceeds Contact Ventana.
the high pressure high limit
12 108 Tank pressure exceeded The tank pressure exceeds Contact Ventana.
the maximum allowable
limit for a specified amount
of time
12 109 Slide failed to be detected The system fails to confirm Contact Ventana.
that a slide is still present.
24814EN Rev E 177

12 111 Barcode reader comm fail There is a slide barcode Contact Ventana.
SLIDE reader comm failure.
12 111 Barcode reader Could not communicate Contact Ventana.

communications failure. with barcode reader.
12 112 Barcode reader comm fail There is a reagent barcode Contact Ventana.
REAGENT reader comm failure.
12 113 Slide processing time Commands attempted to Contact Ventana.

exceeded the limit of the process after the slide
slide tray dwell time. position's dwell time.
Please notify Ventana.
12 114 NVRAM State data is A hardware failure is Contact Ventana.

offline. This indicates a detected in the ARM
controller board failure. If board’s onboard memory.
this situation persists, call
for service
12 115 NVRAM Scratch data is A hardware failure is Contact Ventana.

offline. This indicates a detected in the discrete
processor board failure. If FRAM memory on the
this situation persists, call ARM motherboard.
for service
12 116 Inactive slide attempted to A slide requests a sub- Contact Ventana.

start a sub macro. This macro step while the
typically indicates a nozzle plate is at stations
software error 1, 7,8, or 9, or an inactive
slide requests the macro
step.
12 117 Inactive slide attempted to An inactive slide or a slide Contact Ventana.

move the reagent tray. that is not under nozzle
This typically indicates a plate station 6 requests a
software error. reagent carousel move.
12 118 Inactive slide attempted to Non-active slide attempted Contact Ventana.

setup the next reagent. to move or use a reagent.
This typically indicates a
software error.
12 119 Total allotted Landing The pause time for the Do what is needed,
Zone time exceeded for specified slide has been close the reagent
this slide. too long. When the hood, and sign off the
problem is corrected, error message.
processing will resume. Evaluate the impact of
Error information will the error on slide
appear in run reports for processing.
affected slides.

12 120 Maximum Landing Zone The instrument is in a Finish loading the

time is approaching. Finish landing zone, the time is required reagents and
loading and close the almost up, and the reagent close the lid before
reagent cover lid. cover lid must be closed so the time expires.
processing can resume.
12 121 Cannot resume from

Landing Zone. Reagents
are not yet qualified.
12 122 Slide barcode is The instrument can’t read Make sure the slide
unreadable, check slide the barcode on the barcode is readable
and retry. indicated slide. and re-start the slide.
12 130 Slide #21 temperature The slide position is unable Contact Ventana.
control error (too low) to achieve the setpoint
temperature in the timeout
duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.
24814EN Rev E 179

duration.
duration.
12 140 Slide #21 temperature The slide position Contact Ventana.

control error (too high) temperature exceeds the
maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

sensor bad or temperature is out-of-
disconnected range or disconnected.











duration.

duration.

duration.

duration.
24814EN Rev E 181


duration.

duration.

duration.

duration.

duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.

duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.
duration.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.
24814EN Rev E 183


maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.

maximum allowable.
















24814EN Rev E 185






12 247 Press button on staining A function test has come to Press the button to
instrument to run test a stop and needs to be resume the test.
function continued.
12 251 Open slide tray, perform The system has paused for Complete the
titration/manual a manual application. application and
application, close slide tray resume the staining
& press button when run.
complete).

Instrument Tray Scan

13 4 Barcode read timed out, Attempting to read Restart run.

Please Retry barcodes during the run
process and the barcode
information is formatted
incorrectly.
13 6 Barcode Reader Did Not Misread of slide label. Restart run.

Initialize, Please Retry.
13 7 Slide Barcode Check Digit Misread of slide label. Restart run.

Error, Restart Run
13 8 Invalid Barcode at position Attempting to read reagent Restart run.

%d. (%d represents the barcodes during the run
reagent position on the process and the reagent
reagent carousel) barcode cannot be
decrypted.
13 9 Barcode Trigger Failed, Misread of slide label. Restart run.

Please Retry.
13 11 Barcode read Error Code Misread of Reagent label. Restart run.

%d, Retrying…
13 12 Barcode read Timed Out, Misread of Reagent label. Restart run.

Retrying...
13 13 Barcode read Bad Format, Misread of Reagent label. Restart run.

Retrying...
13 15 Keycode Bar Code on The keycode embedded in Contact Ventana.

Slide at Position %d could the slide barcode could not
not be Resolved. (%d be read correctly during
represents slide position the staining run process.
13 18 Could not acquire Case slide ownership Wait until other

Ownership of all Case could not be acquired from NexES Host system is
Slide(s) another Host system finished with case
during the staining run slide.
process.
Force ownership
acquisition with
access code from
Ventana.
13 20 Instrument Resuming from Information Only Information Only

Landing Zone.
13 21 [#] Slide Run Resumed Information Only Information Only

after being paused for 3
Mins 32 Secs
24814EN Rev E 187

13 22 Instrument Resuming from Information Only Information Only

Reagent Access.
13 23 [#] Reagent Access Information Only Information Only

occurred during run.
13 24 No protocols found for BSS Cleaning run Contact Ventana.

"%s". protocols not defined
13 25 Protocol Default not found BSS Protocol Default Contact Ventana.

"%0:s - %1:s". Selections not defined
13 25 Not enough available slide Too many blacked out Contact Ventana.
positions for "%s". slides to complete cleaning
run
13 26 Procedure not found "%s". BSS Cleaning Procedure Contact Ventana.

not found
13 27 Unable to bind protocol BSS Protocol steps not Contact Ventana.

steps for "%s". satisfied

Staining Run
14 1 Hardware key missing The HASP key is not Reattach and start
from back of host computer attached to the computer NexES.
during the staining run
process.
14 3 Slide at position #XXXX is The selected protocol to be Contact Ventana.

on a faulty heater. used during the run
process was not created
for the instrument type.
14 4 Protocol #%0:s at slide Communication with an Create protocol and

position #%1:d is not instrument fails during a restart staining run.
defined for this instrument staining run when
type. (%0:s represents the information is being
protocol number and %1:d downloaded.
represents slide position
on the carousel))
14 6 Run Aborted. Not The staining instrument Contact Ventana.

acknowledged by remote. encounters a timeout
Error Code %d, Please condition during a staining
Retry. (%d represents the run.
error code)
14 7 Run download Timed Out, The run download Restart staining run
Restart Run information is formatted
incorrectly during the run
process.
14 8 Run Download Aborted A slide is seated on a faulty Restart staining run.

with Bad Format Code %d, heater during staining run.
Please Retry. (%d
represents the format
code)
14 9 The following slide Communication between Contact Ventana.

heater(s) are faulty and the staining instrument and
require service. Press the host application is lost
[ Abort ] to terminate run. during the run information
Press [ Ignore ] to download when performing
continue. a function test.
14 10 Run Download Aborted, Communication between Restart the staining

Restart Run the staining instrument and run.
the host application is lost
during the run information
download when performing
a function test.
24814EN Rev E 189

14 11 Run Download Aborted, Test Function timed out Restart the staining
Restart Run while attempting to run. run.
14 12 Test Function Aborted, During a function test the Restart the staining
Restart Run run download information run.
is formatted incorrectly.
14 13 The following slide A slide is placed on a faulty Contact Ventana.

heater(s) are faulty and heater when a function test
require service. Press is run.
[ Abort ] to terminate run.
Press [ Ignore ] to
continue.
14 22 Database version fields The database version field Contact Ventana.

are out of date. Please of the dispense record is
shutdown and restart different than the database
NexES version in the HASP key.
14 23 Database ownership The ownership database Contact Ventana.

version fields are out of version field of the
date. Please shutdown and dispense record is different
restart NexES than the database version
field in the dispense
record.
14 52 Protocol #%0:s at slide Protocol is defined for a Contact Ventana.

position #%1:d is not different instrument type.
defined for this instrument
type.
14 53 Protocol "%0:s" at slide Protocol is defined for a Contact Ventana.

position #%1:d is not different instrument type.
defined for this instrument
type.
14 54 Slide was detected on a Barcode was acquired on a Move the slide to a

faulty position #%d, please malfunctioned slide valid position. Call
reposition slide. position. Ventana to fix the
malfunctioned slide
positions.

Reagent Access Point

15 26 Run Compiler Terminated Customer tries to start runs A common cause of

Abnormally on the ULTRA, after slides this error is characters
are read the error appears have been used in the
and runs do not start. Instrument friendly
name. A single quote
(‘) and double quote
(“) are not to be used
in the instrument
name and will cause
the 15-26 error. An
example of an
instrument name that
would cause the error
is: Bob’s ULTRA.
Rename the
instrument name
without using the
single or double
quotes. In the
example above you
could rename to:
Bobs ULTRA.
15 87 [#] Manual application Manual application to Select a new Reagent

conflicts with the selected newly started slide cannot Access point.
Reagent Access Point, fit within the selected
slide run will be Reagent Access window.
reattempted in 4 minutes.
15 88 Dispense conflicts with the Newly added slides cannot Select a new Reagent
selected Reagent Access fit within the selected Access point.
Point, slide run will be Reagent Access point
reattempted in 4 minutes
17 1 The selected Reagent Selected Reagent Access Select a valid

Access Point is no longer Point is no longer available Reagent Access Point
available, please select
another Reagent Access
Point
24814EN Rev E 191

Database Table Repair

99 1 Unable to fix. Table may The database tables Contact Ventana.

be corrupted cannot be fixed when
starting the host
application.
99 2 Fixing Archive data to your Attempting to fix database Contact Ventana.

Live system may cause tables that are mixed with
undesirable results. This Archive and Live data
action is not when starting the host
recommended! application.
99 3 Unable to fix. Table may Unable to re-encrypt Contact Ventana.

be corrupted database tables while
attempting to repair the
table when starting the
host application.
99 7 The Zip file already exists. Attempting to create a zip Rename the old file if
Overwrite? archive file and the zip file you wish to keep it.
already exists. Otherwise, click Yes
to automatically
overwrite the file.
99 8 Error reading data from Unable to read the HASP Contact Ventana.
hardware key key when creating a zip
archive

Ultimate Reagent Access

Reagent Access Points and Adding New Slides
When a reagent access point is set and new slides are added which have a reagent dispense scheduled during
the set reagent access point, the newly added slide will be delayed by 4 minutes in order to keep the set reagent
access point. The following message will be displayed on the run report:
15-88 [x]: Dispense conflicts with the selected Reagent Access Point, slide run will be reattempted in ##
minutes.
Reagent Access Points and Manual Reagent Application

Hand Apply (aka Manual Application or Man App or Titration) and Wait For Button steps are staining
procedure functions that require user intervention to continue processing a staining run. The Hand Apply step
requires you to manually apply a reagent to the slide, whereas the Wait For Button step requires that you push
a button on the instrument to continue processing the slide.
Each of these steps can have a variable length of time for execution. Due to this variable length of time, it
becomes impossible to determine the actual time of the reagent access points that follow a Hand Apply or Wait
For Button step.
In the event that a reagent access point is selected prior to loading a slide that needs a manual application, the
following message will be displayed in the global communication bar:
15-87 [x]: Manual application conflicts with the selected Reagent Access Point, slide run will be
reattempted in ## minutes. (Where [x] is the slide position.)
The software will display the next available reagent access points after the first scheduled Hand Apply or Wait
For Button step, however, it is not advisable to select one of these reagent access points as it may change once
the Hand Apply or Wait for Button step is complete. If the selected reagent access point changes the following
message will be displayed in the global communication bar:
17-1: The selected Reagent Access Point is no longer available, please select another Reagent Access
Point.
Once the Hand Apply or Wait For Button step(s) has completed, the software will recalculate reagent access
points and display them with accurate times.
Expired, Exhausted, Ownership, Registration, Duplication Issues

Error Message Instrument View What to do
If an added reagent is The reagent carousel If the error occurs before the close hood alarm
unusable due to issues position(s) on the sequence is reached, you can open the hood
involving Expiration, Instrument View will turn and correct the error.
Quantity, Ownership, red, indicating that the If the error occurs after the close hood alarm,
Registration or reagent is in an error the hood will remain locked and you will need
Duplication, the software state. to schedule a new reagent access point in
displays an error message order to open the hood and address the error.
in the Global
If the reagents in error are required to start
Communication bar
newly added slides, those slides are not
instructing you as to the
processed and will remain in a compile failed
nature of the reagent
state. Any unprimed reagents in these error
error.
states will NOT be primed during this process.
24814EN Rev E 193

Missing Reagents – New Slides

If reagents or kit The reagent carousel If the error occurs before the close hood alarm
components are missing, position(s) on the sequence is reached, you can open the hood
the software displays an Instrument View will turn and correct the error.
error message in the red for the partial reagent If the error occurs after the close hood alarming
Global Communication kit components that are position, the hood will remain locked and you
Bar listing the reagents present on the instrument. need to schedule a new reagent access point
that are missing. in order to open the hood and address the
error.
state. If a kit has missing components, any
newly added kit components will NOT be
primed.
Missing Reagents – Processing Slides

If required reagents were N/A If the error occurs before the close hood alarm
accidently removed from sequence is reached, you can open the hood
the reagent carousel and correct the error.
during a reagent access If the error occurs after the close hood alarming
point, the software will position, the hood will remain locked until the
display an error message nozzle plate swings back to the home position
in the Global and a new four minute cycle begins. The
Communication Bar instrument open hood icon will flash amber to
instructing that reagents indicate when you can open the hood and
are missing. correct the error. This sequence will continue
until the error is corrected.
If the error is not corrected and the reagent
wheel is not qualified, the affected slide will be
aborted at time of next dispense. The following
error message will be displayed:
12-26 [x]: Reagent Access is incomplete.
Failure to dispense a reagent resulted in
aborting the slide. (Where x is the slide
number of the aborted run.)

Reagent Positioning
If a complete reagent kit The reagent carousel If the incorrect positioning error occurs before
set is loaded but the positions on the the nozzle plate reaches the close hood
components that are Instrument View will turn alarming position, you can open the hood and
required to be side-by-side red for the incorrectly correct the error.
are positioned incorrectly, positioned reagents. If the error occurs during the last minute of the
the software displays an close hood alarm, the hood will remain locked
error message in the and you need to schedule a new reagent
Global Communication access point in order to open the hood and
Bar indicating that the address the error.
reagents that are required
to be side-by-side are
incorrectly positioned.
state.
24814EN Rev E 195


CHAPTER 18
Manage Inventory
About Inventory Management

The Inventory List on the BenchMark ULTRA instrument keeps track of all your reagents, kits, bulk products,
and dispensers. You can use the Inventory List to record and research product information, deactivate or
reactivate products, and create customized reports. Examples:
• To identify products to re-order, you can look up all products with a specified number of tests remaining.
• To decide which products to use first, you can create a list of all products with the earliest expiration date
at the top.
How It Works
Every product you use with the BenchMark ULTRA system must be recorded in inventory. A bar code label on
each product dispenser links the dispenser to an inventory record. The record tells the system what is in the
dispenser, and the system updates the record each time the product is used. Inventory records include key
information such as reagent name, lot number, expiration date, and amount of fluid in a dispenser.
Reagents
When the system compiles a staining run, it checks the inventory records to make sure the dispensers on the
instrument contain enough fluid to complete the run. It also uses the inventory records to determine which
dispensers to use first, make sure reagents have not expired, and monitor other key information. Whenever a
reagent dispenser is used in a run, the system subtracts the amount of product used and updates the inventory
record.
Example: The dispenser with serial number 49 contains DAKO WT-1, 50 of its 250 drops have been used, and
200 drops are still available to dispense.
Reagents and other products may be purchased from Ventana or from other suppliers. Fillable dispensers used
with non-Ventana products are always provided by Ventana.
24814EN Rev E 197

18 Manage Inventory BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Bulk Fluids
Bulk fluids are recorded the same as reagents. Because bulk bottles are not identified by bar code, the amount
remaining is not calculated in the inventory system. Instead, the bulk lot number is associated with the serial
number of the instrument(s) the lot will be used on. This tells the software that you will be filling the
instrument’s bulk bottles with that lot. The system records the number of milliliters in the lot and keeps track of
how many slides have been stained with it. The Run Report shows which lot was used in each slide run. The
Bulk Usage Report shows the original fluid amount and the number of slides stained with it to date. The lot is
used continuously until it is used up, and then a new lot is associated with the instrument. Levels of bulk fluids
on the instrument are monitored by sensors and are not associated with lot numbers.
IMPORTANT: Best practice is to avoid mixing bulk reagents from different lots. Ventana recommends
purging the bulk reservoir and lines before introducing a new reagent lot.
Products from Ventana

One-Touch Registration
Ventana supplied reagents, kits, bulk product containers, and fillable dispensers come with all required
information stored in a memory button on the package. One-touch registration automatically copies the
information from the button and records it in the Inventory List. When the product is recorded, the seal on the
product button is broken to ensure it won’t be recorded again.
If you want to double check products before information is recorded and the seal is broken, you can disable
One Touch Product Registration in the Host Setup options. Disabling One Touch activates the Finalize button
in the Register Ventana Products panel. Product information is displayed for your review. If the product is what
you want, you click Finalize to record the product and break its seal. To cancel, you click Close. Otherwise, the
process is the same as for one-touch registration, which is presented later in this chapter.
Reagent Dispensers
All reagent dispensers are supplied by Ventana and come labeled with bar codes that identify them to the
system. Dispensers may be pre-filled with VENTANA reagents or may be user-fillable with products from
other suppliers. Reagents and antibodies not purchased from Ventana must be transferred to VENTANA
dispensers and manually recorded in inventory.
Every dispenser has a lifetime, defined by how many drops of fluid can be dispensed from it before it must be
retired. A user-fillable dispenser might initially be filled partway and topped off with more of the same reagent
later. You can add more fluid whenever you want, up to the dispenser’s lifetime limit. When you add product,
it’s important to report the added amount to the inventory system. (See Top Off a Partly Filled Dispenser,
page 222.)

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 18 Manage Inventory
Products from Other Suppliers

IMPORTANT: Products purchased from suppliers other than Ventana should be validated and the
validation records retained, in accordance with CAP/CLIA and other applicable regulatory guidelines.
Products purchased from suppliers other than Ventana are transferred to VENTANA dispensers for use on the
BenchMark ULTRA instrument. When you fill a VENTANA dispenser with a non-Ventana product, you need
to complete three steps to record the product in the inventory system.
1. Log the product manually to identify it to the system.
2. Register the dispenser using the Product Registration Probe.
3. Fill the dispenser—that is, tell the system that a dispenser registered using step 2 contains a product logged
using step 1. For details, see Register Non-Ventana Products, page 214.
Figure 191. Registering Non-Ventana Products
24814EN Rev E 199

The Inventory List

The Inventory List is a powerful tool for registering new products, finding and organizing information, and
creating custom and standard reports. VENTANA products are entered into the Inventory List when you
register them using the Product Registration Probe. Other products are entered when you register them
manually. Every product used on your instruments is recorded and tracked in the Inventory List.
You can specify which product records to view and what information to include, activate or deactivate
products, and track expiration dates and tests remaining. You can move columns and sort or group records by
column headings or column data. After you select and organize product information, you can print a report of it
as it appears on the screen or print a standard Product Usage Report.
To open the Inventory List, click the Inventory button in the Global Navigation.
Figure 192. Inventory List
(1) View: Reset Defaults button

(2) View: Show Filter button
(3) Quick Find Near: Go button
Figure 193. Inventory List Buttons
(4) Actions: Register Products button
(5) Actions: Associate and Log button
(6) Actions: Print Report button

View Product Details

There are two ways to view product details in the inventory system: from the Inventory List and from View
Registered Products.
In the Inventory List

2. At the Inventory List, double-click a record. The Product Detail view opens. Kit components, if any, are
listed in the lower panel.
Figure 194. Product Detail
3. To see the columns at the right of the screen, click and drag the horizontal scroll bar.
4. Type comments about the product in the Comments space. The Close button changes to Cancel, and the
Save button is activated. Click the Save button to keep your comments or click the Cancel button to erase
them. The Close button returns.
5. To return to the Inventory List, click the Close button.
24814EN Rev E 201

In View Registered Products

1. Click the Inventory button in the Global Navigation, and then click the Register Products button.
2. Click the View Products button, and then click the tab for the type of product you want to see. Use the
vertical scroll bar to move the list up and down.
Figure 195. View Registered Products
3. In the Kit tab, click the View Kit Components button to see the contents of a selected kit. To see all kit
components for all kits, click the View Kit Components check box at the bottom of the window.
Figure 196. Kit Components
4. Click the Close button to return to each preceding window.

Organize the Inventory List

Move Columns
1. To change the order of the columns, click a column heading and drag it to a new position. Green arrows
show where it will be inserted. If the column can’t be moved to where you drag it, an X will appear.
Figure 197. Move a Column
2. When the position is right, release the mouse button. The column moves to the new location and other
columns shift to make room for it.
3. If the move disrupts the column widths, right-click a column heading, and then select Best Fit.
Sort Product Records

Sort Using Column Headings
Click any column heading to sort the whole inventory list by that heading. Click again to reverse the sort order.
Figure 198. Sort by Column Heading
Sort Using Column Options

1. Right-click a column heading to see the column options.
2. Select Sort Ascending or Sort Descending. All of the records in
the Inventory List are sorted by the values in the selected
heading.
3. To go back to the original order, right-click the column
heading, and then select Clear Sorting.
Figure 199. Column Options
24814EN Rev E 203

Group Products
1. Right-click a column heading, and then select Group By This Field. All records that have the same value in
the column are grouped together. The column heading appears in the Group by list box.
Figure 200. Inventory Grouped by Field
2. To eliminate all but one of the groups, right-click the column heading and select Group By Box from the
column options. The box is displayed in a banner above the grid. Click it and select the value of the group
to keep.
Figure 201. Inventory Filtered by Group
3. To remove the Group By Box, click it and drag it off the banner.
4. To remove the banner, right-click any column heading, and then select Group by Box.
You can also:
• Group and filter records using the View Layout and Group by features.
• Click a column heading list box and select a value to display only records with that value.
• Right-click a column heading, and then select Group by Box to open the Group by banner and list box.

Flag Items for Notification

Use Quick Find Near to:
• Find products with an approximate number of
tests remaining or days until expiration.
• Tell the system to notify you automatically when
it finds products that match your specifications.
Figure 202. Inventory Quick Find Near

2. At the Inventory List, select a number in the Quick Find Near Expiration or Tests field, and then click the
Go button. Only records that match your specifications remain visible.
3. To restore all records, type 0 in the field and click Go again, or else click the Reset button.
4. To be notified of products that are near a specified expiration date or number of tests remaining, leave the
number or date in the Expiration or Tests box. Next time you start the system, inventory records are
checked. If any match your criteria, the Inventory button in the Global Navigation turns red, and the
product records are flagged in the Inventory List.
Figure 203. Inventory Flag
5. To see the flagged records, click the Inventory button. The records are highlighted in the Inventory List. If
you want a printed list, you can select the records, and then click the Print button and select Inventory
Report.
Figure 204. Flagged Inventory Records
24814EN Rev E 205

Retrieve Inventory Warnings

The Quick Find Near option in the Inventory List helps you identify products with specified expiration dates or
numbers of tests remaining. A new option in the Layout menu lets you retrieve the last Quick Find setting you
entered.
1. At the Inventory List, enter a value in one of the Quick Find Near fields (1), then click the Go button (2).
The records that match your entry are displayed with warnings. The Warnings option appears in the Layout
field (3).
Figure 205. Quick Find Near
2. In the Layout menu, choose a different filter such as Bulks Only. The list of records changes and the
warnings are gone.
3. Open the Layout menu and select Warnings. The records with warnings reappear.
Figure 206. Layout Warnings Option
4. To permanently erase the Quick Find Near entry, you can either click the Reset button (4) or select
Default—All data, no groups in the Layout menu.
Hide Kit Components

Normally both kits and their components are displayed in the Inventory List. An option in the Layout menu—
Show All-Hide Kit Components—lets you display the kits without their components.
1. At the Inventory List, click the Layout list box.
2. In the Layout menu, select Show All-Hide Kit Components.
3. To restore the full list, select Default-All data, no groups in the Layout menu.

Custom Filter
You can create filters to sort data in the Inventory List..
Figure 207. Filter Buttons
1. To open the Filter Builder, click the Filter button (1), and then click the Customize button (2).
2. In the Filter Builder, you can either set up a new filter or open a filter you created and saved earlier. After
you select or create the filter, click the Apply button. Only the records defined in the filter remain in the
Inventory List.
Figure 208. Filter Builder
3. If you create a new filter, click Save As. Enter a name for the filter and click Save.
4. Click the OK button to close the filter.
5. In the Layout menu, select another option. The grid changes to display the new set of records.
6. To re-use the last filter applied, open the Layout menu again and select Custom.
24814EN Rev E 207

Print Inventory Reports

NOTE: Before printing a report, make sure the report printer is connected to the computer, turned on,
and has enough paper to print the report.
Print a Custom Report

You can print whatever is currently visible in the Inventory List. For example, if you have set the View options
to show only dispensers, with dispensers grouped by tests remaining, you can print the result as a report. Or if
you have flagged items using the Quick Find Near option, you can print the list of flagged items.
2. At the Inventory List, organize the information to include in the report. Your list of records might be longer
than the screen, but the records that don’t fit on the screen will still be in the report.
3. Click the Print Reports button, and then select Inventory List.
Figure 209. Custom Inventory Report
4. At the confirmation message, click Yes. A print preview of the report is displayed.
Figure 210. Inventory Report Preview
5. Click the Printer button in the Print Preview tool bar to print the report. You can also use Print Preview to
save the report.

Save a Custom Report

1. Complete the first four steps in Print a Custom Inventory Report, above.
2. At Print Preview, click the Save button (disk icon) in the toolbar.
3. Navigate to your reports folder, name the report, and click the Save button. If you don’t specify a report
name, the name of the report shown in Print Preview will be used.
Open a Saved Report

2. At the Inventory List, click the Print Reports button, and then select Inventory List.
3. At Print Preview, click the Open Folder button in the toolbar.
4. Navigate to the report file, and then click Open. The report is displayed in a preview pane.
5. Click Open again. The report opens in Print Preview where you can view or print it.
Print a Detail Usage Report

About the Dispenser, Vial, and Bulk Report Options
• The Detail Usage Report for Dispensers and Vials provides information for a single product based on
product serial number. Unlike the Product Usage Report, which provides a total number of tests run for a
specific product, the Detail Usage Report lists every staining run where the product was used.
• The Detail Usage Report for Bulks provides information for a single product based on product master lot.
All serial numbers for the master lot are included.
NOTE: When login passwords are enabled, the Print Product Usage Report privilege is required to
generate this report.
About Error Messages

If there is no run data associated with a selected product when the Detail Usage menu option is selected, the
following error messages will be displayed:
For Dispensers and Vials: 7-61: No tests were run with this dispenser.
For Bulks: 7-63: No runs have used this bulk fluid.
To print a Detail Usage Report

1. In the Inventory View, click an individual Dispenser, Vial or Bulk product.
24814EN Rev E 209

2. Click the Print button and then select the Detail Usage menu option.
Figure 211. Access the Detail Usage Report from the Inventory View
3. At the confirmation message, click Yes. A print preview of the report is displayed.
4. Click the Printer button in the Print Preview tool bar to print the report. You can also use Print Preview to
save the report.
Print a Product Usage Report

The Product Usage Report is a standard report that shows how many tests were used from each registered
dispenser over a specified time period.
2. Click the Print Reports button, and then select Product Usage.
Figure 212. Print Product Usage Report
3. Select the products to include in the report. For each type of product, click the product tab, and then select
the products. To select individual products, CTRL click each product. To select all products under a tab,
click the Select All button.
NOTE: Select All and Clear All Selections apply only to the currently selected tab.
4. Specify a date range. You can select a range in the Select panel, or select Custom in the Select Panel, and
then select Start and End Dates in the Select By Date panel.
5. Click the Print Report button. The Print Preview window opens with the report displayed. Click the Printer
button to print the report on the default printer.

Figure 213. Product Usage Report Preview
Print a Bulk Product Usage Report

1. Click the Inventory Button in the Global Navigation.
2. Click the Print Reports button and select Product Usage.
3. Click the Bulk Fluids tab, and then click the Select All button. Make sure no items are selected on the other
tabs.
Figure 214. Print a Bulk Product Usage Report
4. Specify a date range. You can click a range in the Select panel, or click Custom in the Select Panel, and
then select Start and End Dates in the Select By Date panel.
5. Click the Print Report button. The report is displayed in Print Preview. Click the Printer button to print the
report on the default printer.
24814EN Rev E 211

Figure 215. Bulk Product Usage Report
Associate Bulk Products with Instruments

2. Click the Associate and Log button, and then select Associate Bulk Products.
Figure 216. Associate Bulk Products
3. Click a product tab. A list of lot numbers is displayed in the left panel and a list of instruments is displayed
in the right panel.
4. Click a lot number, and then click an instrument to associate it with. (To associate the product with all
connected instruments, click the Select All button.) When the instrument is selected, the Associate button
is activated.
5. Click the Associate button. The status changes from unassociated to associated.

Register Ventana Products

1. Click the Inventory button in the Global Navigation, and then click the Product Registration button in the
Inventory List. The Register Ventana Products panel opens.
Figure 217. Register Ventana Products
2. Seat the product registration probe (2) on

the product memory button (1) on the
package.
3. The probe reads the package information
into the system, and creates an inventory
record. The new record appears in the
Inventory List, highlighted in blue. It
contains all of the information read from
the product memory button.
Figure 218. Registration Probe and Memory Button
Figure 219. New Product in the Inventory List
NOTE: If One Touch Product Registration is disabled in the Host Setup options, the Finalize button will
be activated when you apply the probe. This allows you to check the product information before
recording it. To complete the registration, click Finalize. To cancel the registration, click Close.
24814EN Rev E 213

Register Non-Ventana Products

Non-Ventana products are logged into inventory and then associated with registered Ventana dispensers (see
Register Ventana Products, page 213). After product and dispenser are logged, they are combined using the Fill
feature.
IMPORTANT: Every product must have a unique name. If you receive the same product from different
suppliers, give the product a different name for each supplier. For example, if you receive XYZ from
both Antibodies-R-Us and Apex, call one product XYZ-A and the other XYZ-B.
Log Products
2. Click the Associate and Log button, and then select Log Fillable Antibodies, Log Fillable Probes, or Log
Fillable Reagents. The corresponding log product view opens.
3. At the log product view, do one of the following:
• To log a new lot of a product that has been logged before, click the Log Antibody (Probe, Reagent) tab.
A list of logged products is displayed. Click the product you want to log, and then enter the required
information.
Figure 220. Log an Existing Product
• To log a product that has never been logged into the system before, click the Log New Antibody
(Probe, Reagent) tab, and then enter the required information.
Figure 221. Log a New Product

4. When you start to enter information, the Receive button is activated. The system automatically enters the
current date as the Receive Date and a year later as the Expiration Date. If the actual expiration date is
different, you can select it in the Expiration Date list box.
5. When your entries are complete, click the Receive button. A message tells you whether or not quality
control information has been entered for the lot number. Click OK to clear the message. (For information
about quality control procedures, see Quality Control, page 117.)
6. You can now do any of the following:
• Repeat the steps to enter more products of the same type.
• Click another tab to enter a different type of product.
• Click the Close button to return to the Inventory List.
• Fill a VENTANA dispenser with the product.
The following sections tell you what to enter for each type of product.
Log Fillable Antibodies

Log Antibody
Figure 222. Log a Fillable Antibody
Field Description
Lot Number Type in the lot number on the product package. (Required)
Concentration Click the Concentration Unknown check box, or click a unit in the Units
panel, and then type the concentration in the box beside the unit
identifier.
24814EN Rev E 215

Log New Antibody
Figure 223. Log a New Fillable Antibody
Field Description
Antibody Name Type a unique antibody name. (Required)
Manufacturer Type the manufacturer. (Required)
Catalog Number Type the catalog number. (Used for quality control reports.)
Clone Type clone.
Immunoglobin Sub- Select IgG or IgM.

class
Presentation Select Ascites, Supernatant, Lyophillisate, or Predilute. If you select

nothing, the system will use the value shown in the box.
Species Select Mouse, Rabbit, Guinea Pig, Rat, Goat, Sheep, Horse, or Donkey.
If you select nothing, the system will use the value shown in the box.
panel, and then type the concentration in the box beside the unit
identifier.

Log Fillable Probes

Log Probe
Figure 224. Log a Fillable Probe
Field Description
panel, and type the concentration in the box beside the unit identifier.
Log New Probe
Figure 225. Log a New Fillable Probe
24814EN Rev E 217

Field Description
Probe Name Type a unique product name. (Required)
Manufacturer Type the manufacturer’s name (Required)
Label Select Fluorescein, Digoxigen, or Biotin from the list box. If you select
nothing, the system will use the value shown in the box.
Type of Probe Select Nick Translated, Oligo, Peptide Nucleic Acid, or Branched Chain.
If you select nothing, the system will use the value shown in the box.
Target Select Human, Mouse, Guinea Pig, or Rat. If you select nothing, the
system will use the value shown in the box.
panel, and type the concentration in the box beside the unit identifier.
Log Fillable Reagents

Log Reagents
Figure 226. Log a Fillable Reagent
Field Description

Log New Reagents
Figure 227. Log a New Fillable Reagent
Field Description
Reagent Name Type a unique reagent name. (Required)
Manufacturer Type the manufacturer. (Used for quality control reports.)
Fill a Ventana Dispenser

You can fill a new dispenser, empty and refill a used dispenser, or top off a partially filled dispenser. The
fillable dispenser and non-Ventana product must both be recorded in the Inventory List before you fill the
dispenser.
Fill a New Dispenser

2. Click the Associate and Log button, and then select Fill Ventana Dispenser.
3. Click the tab for the type of product you want to fill. Dispensers that have not been filled show zero in
Tests Remaining.
Figure 228. Choose a Dispenser
4. Click a dispenser to select it, and then click the Fill button. A list of products appears below the dispenser.
The Milliliters field at the bottom of the screen shows how much the dispenser can hold. You can use the
amount shown or type in a smaller number.
24814EN Rev E 219

Figure 229. Choose a Reagent
5. Click a reagent to select it, and then click the Fill button. The system combines the dispenser and reagent
and saves the information. The Product Name now includes both the dispenser name and the reagent name,
Tests Remaining has changed to the maximum number, and the reagent’s Lot Number is in the product
record.
Figure 230. Fill a Dispenser
NOTE: The Fill (or Partial) button completes the process. When you click it, the record is saved, so it is
good practice to check before you click.
Figure 231. Filled Dispenser Record
Empty and Refill a Used Dispenser
CAUTION: Due to the risk of cross-contamination, Ventana strongly discourages re-using any
dispenser for a product other than the one it originally contained.
A dispenser can be used for a limited number of dispenses, no matter what you put into it. After that, it must be
discarded.
1. Dispose of any product left in the dispenser.

4. Click the tab for the type of product you want to refill.
Figure 232. Choose a Dispenser
5. Select the dispenser, note the lot number, and then click the Fill button. The Fill button changes to Refill,
and reagent names are displayed below the product record.
Figure 233. Choose a Product
6. Select the product to refill the dispenser with. It should have the same lot number as the previous product.
7. Specify how much product to put in the dispenser. The maximum amount is shown in the Milliliters box.
To add less, type a smaller number in the box. (Even though the container is empty, you can fill it only to
the number of tests remaining in its lifetime.)
8. Click the Refill button. You are prompted to confirm that the old volume in the dispenser has been
emptied. When you click Yes, the product record is updated. You can then add the actual product to the
dispenser.
Figure 234. Empty and Refill Dispenser
24814EN Rev E 221

Top Off a Partly Filled Dispenser
CAUTION: Due to the risk of cross-contamination, Ventana strongly discourages re-using any
dispenser for a product other than the one it originally contained.
A dispenser can initially be partly filled. Later you can add more of the same reagent, up to the dispenser’s
lifetime limit.
3. Click the tab for the type of product, and then select the dispenser and click the Fill button. A list of
reagents is displayed. Because the dispenser is not empty, the Partial button is activated.
Figure 235. Top Off a Dispenser
4. Specify how much product to put in the dispenser. The maximum amount is shown in the Milliliters box.
To add less, type a smaller number in the box. If you enter a larger number, the maximum amount is
displayed again. You can either:
• Click No to cancel, and then choose another dispenser that has more tests left.
• Click Partial to fill the dispenser to the amount shown. The information is saved, and the product
record is updated.
Figure 236. Topped-Off Dispenser Record

Deactivate Products
2. At the Inventory List, select the record, and then click the Deactivate button at the bottom of the screen.
Figure 237. Product Deactivate Button
3. At the confirmation message, click Yes. The product’s status is changed from A to D.
Reactivate Products
2. At the Inventory List, open the Layout list box and select Deactivated Status Only.
3. Find and select the product, and then click the Reactivate button.
4. At the confirmation message, click Yes. The product status changes from (D) deactivated to (A) activated.
24814EN Rev E 223


CHAPTER 19
Set Up the System

The host computer system controls up to eight connected instruments. The setup options in the Ventana System
Software are used to customize the host computer, set software and configuration preferences, and define user
names and passwords.
About Setup
Slide Data Fields
Slide data includes information such as patient ID and name, institution and requester, accession ID, case ID,
block ID, and slide ID. Each category of data is defined by a slide data field. Slide data fields can be used when
you design label templates and will appear in SLS. During a staining run, the system gathers the specified data
and records it in the computer. You can update or edit the data for any slide and print it on a Run Report.
Standard slide data fields are defined in the Ventana System Software. You can use the standard fields, define
your own fields, or change the names of existing fields.
Keycodes
Keycodes track slides through the staining process and activate the slide data fields you use in label templates.
You can set up the system to scan label bar codes for keycodes only or for both keycodes and protocols. When
a slide label is scanned, the protocol information is included with the keycode information.
To use keycodes with slide labels, you define a keycode range from zero to 99,999 in the Ventana System
Software. When a slide label is generated, the software assigns it a keycode number from the specified range,
and includes the number in the bar code. During the staining run, the system stores the keycode and associated
data and keeps them until the run is completed. After the run, the information appears on the Run Report, and
the keycode is deleted (later it will be re-used for another slide). If a slide has not been run or the slide label has
been damaged, misprinted, or lost, the keycode assigned to it can be deleted to make it available for another
slide.
Reagent Access Permission and Login Passwords Enabled

When Login Passwords are enabled in the Setup Host option, the Ultimate Reagent Access feature requires an
update to the user privileges. Any laboratory personnel who will set reagent access points will need to have
their user privileges updated to add the “Manage Reagent Access Points” option.
NOTE: When Login Passwords are not enabled, all users have privileges to manage reagent
access points as the default.
24814EN Rev E 225

19 Set Up the System BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Set Up the Host

You can specify how alarms, print preview, and some inventory and other system functions will work in your
system.
1. At the Home View, click the Setup button, and then click Setup Host.
Figure 238. Host Options Tab
2. Double-click an option to set it to Yes or No.
Option Description
Context Hints Enabled Context hints provide information about screen features when
the mouse hovers over a feature.
Print Preview Enabled If Print Preview is enabled, reports are displayed in a preview
window before they are printed. If it is not enabled, reports are
printed with no preview.
One-Touch Product If this feature is enabled, product information is entered directly

Registration Enabled into the inventory database when you touch the probe to the
package button. If it is not enabled, a confirmation message
will be displayed when you touch the probe to the button,
giving you a chance to reverse or change the registration.
Fill Dispenser after This feature determines how a user-fillable dispenser will be
Registration Enabled recorded after you register it using the product registration
probe. If the feature is enabled, the Fill Ventana Dispenser
form will be displayed so you can specify a product to fill the
dispenser with. If the feature is not enabled, the dispenser will
be recorded in the inventory database as an empty dispenser;
you can specify a product to fill it with later.
Associate Bulk after This feature determines how a bulk product will be recorded
Registration Enabled after you register it using the product registration probe. If the
feature is enabled, the Associate Bulk Products form will be
displayed so you can associate the product with an instrument
immediately. If the feature is not enabled, the product will be
recorded in the inventory database, and you can associate it
with an instrument later.
Discovery Bulk Tracking Not currently in use.

Enabled
Run Failure Alarm Enabled If this feature is enabled, an alarm will sound when an error
occurs during a staining run. If it is disabled, no alarm will
sound.
Backup Confirmation at Run This feature specifies whether a backup will be initiated
Start Enabled automatically at the start of a run. If it is enabled, a
confirmation message will be displayed before the backup is
initiated.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 19 Set Up the System
Option Description
Edit Protocol by Registered This feature specifies whether or not only registered products
Products Enabled will be available for selection in the Protocol Editor. If it is
enabled, the List Only Registered Products box in the Protocol
Editor is automatically checked.
Safe Printing Enabled Enabling this feature adjusts printing quality if you encounter
printing problems.
Run Start Alarm via Sound Enabling this feature activates an audible alarm that you can
Card Enabled adjust using the computer Control Panel setting.
3. When you have finished setting the host options, click the Save button.
Enter Address for Report Headings

You can enter a name and address as you want it to appear on report headings.
1. At the Home View, click the Setup button.
2. Click Setup Host, and then click the Institution tab.
Figure 239. Institution Tab
3. To edit an option, double-click in the field and type an entry.

4. When your entries are complete, click the Save button.
Find Hardware Serial Numbers

2. Click Setup Host, and then click the Instrument Info tab.
Figure 240. Instrument Info Tab
3. To edit an option, double-click in the field and type an entry.

24814EN Rev E 227

Set Up Passwords and Log-ins

Security rules specify password requirements and log-in timeouts.
NOTE: When Login Passwords are enabled, the Ultimate Reagent Access feature requires that any
laboratory personnel who will set reagent access points need an update to their user privileges to add
the “Manage Reagent Access Points” option. When Login Passwords are not enabled, all users have
privileges to manage reagent access points as the default.

2. Click Setup Host, and then click the Security tab.
Figure 241. Security Tab
3. Double-click an option to change the setting.
Option Description
Login Passwords Enabled If this feature is enabled, each user must enter a user name
and password to access the system. If it is not enabled, only a
user name is required.
Login Timeout This feature specifies the time after which a user will be
automatically logged out when the system is inactive. Double-
click in the field and enter any number between 1 and 999
(minutes). The default is five minutes.
Signoff Passwords Enabled When an error message is displayed in the Communicator, it

must be signed off before a run can proceed. If this feature is
enabled, a password must be entered to sign off on an error
message.

Define Slide Data Fields

Slide data fields can be used when you design slide label templates in SLS. They are also used with keycodes
to gather slide data information during a staining run. The system assigns default names for slide data fields. If
your facility prefers different names, you can use the Slide Data options to rename any field.
Figure 242. Slide Data Tab
2. Click the Slide Data tab, and then do any of the following:
• To change a field name, double-click in the field and type a different name.
• To allow slide data to be edited in SLS, set Edit Slide Data Enabled to Yes.
Set End of Run Signal and Pre-Reagent Access Point Alarm

You can turn on or off the beep that signals the end of a staining run or the start of a reagent access point.
1. At the Home View, click the Setup button, then click Setup Host.
2. Click the Stainer Options tab and do either of the following:
• Double-click the End of Run Signal option to change it to Yes or No.
• In the Pre-Reagent Access Point Alarm Warning field, enter the number of minutes you would like to
be warned prior to a reagent access point arriving. You will hear a short series of beeps at each minute
interval. The default setting is 5 minutes.
Figure 243. Stainer Options Tab
Set Up VLM Collaboration

The Ventana Lab Manager (VLM) software enables the VENTANA system to communicate with other vendor
systems in the Anatomic Pathology lab. VLM allows data sharing between staining host systems and the
staining and imaging platforms. When used with the Ventana Interface Point (VIP), the VENTANA systems
can share data with the hospital Laboratory Information System (LIS).
24814EN Rev E 229

Open VLM Options

2. Click Setup Host, and then click the VLM Options tab.
Figure 244. VLM Options
Specify VLM Options

1. Click the Ventana Lab Manager Collaboration Enabled check box and set the options.
Option What To Do
Lab Manager Name Type a name that identifies VLM to other vendor systems.
Exchange Protocols Click to share protocols created on another host system. You
will then need to specify the Rules for Protocol Add Offers and
Protocol Modify Offers. You can specify Ask or Select.
• Select Ask to display the protocols that have been added or
modified by another host system and view their details to
determine whether to accept or reject them. This is the
default entry.
• Select Accept to automatically accept protocols that have
been added or modified by another host system without
reviewing them.
Exchange Cases Click to share cases created on another host computer. Click
the Designated Label Printer check box to designate the host
system for printing queued labels generated via VIP. You can
select one of the following Label Printing Modes.
• Queued: Labels generated by VIP will remain in the queue
until selected and printed from SLS.
• Pass Through: The labels generated by VIP will go directly
to a printer.
Exchange Dispensers and Click to share dispensers or vials created on another host
Vials system.

Option What To Do
Exchange User and User Share user names and systems privileges created on another
Group Privileges host system. You will then need to specify the rules for User
Add Offers and User Modify Offers. You can select Ask or
Accept.
• Select Ask to display the users and user groups that have
been added or modified by another host system and view
their details to determine whether to accept or reject them.
This is the default entry.
• Select Accept to automatically accept users and user
groups that have been added or modified by another host
system, without displaying a notification message.
Note: If a user or a user group is renamed, the old name will be
deleted, and the new name will be added.
2. When you are finished, click the Save button.
Activate Keycode Slide Labeling

1. Click the Enable Keycode Slide Labeling check boxes and set the options.
Option What To Do
Only Keycodes Click this box if you want the BenchMark ULTRA instrument to
read only keycodes from slide labels.
Both Protocol Bar Codes and Click this box if you want the BenchMark ULTRA instrument to
Keycodes read both protocols and keycodes from slide labels.
2. Under Keycode Range, select the range of numbers for the host computer to use to assign to slide labels,
and then click Commit. A red key appears with the number range. A gold key symbol displays keycode
ranges for other host computers.
24814EN Rev E 231

Specify SLS Options

2. Click Setup Host, and then click the SLS Options tab.
Figure 245. SLS Options
3. Under Label Printers, you can see the name of the printer connected to the host computer. Click Add
Printer to select a printer.
4. Under Alignment, use the arrows to set the vertical and horizontal alignment of the text on the label.
5. To add label stock to the printer, click the appropriate button for your printer type.
6. Set the following options for your label printer.
Option What To Do
Print Speed Click Slow or Fast. Fast is the recommended speed.
Print Density Enter a number from 6 to 14 to adjust the print quality. If print is
fading, enter a higher number to increase the density.
Orientation Click normal to print labels right-side up. Click 180 degrees to
print labels upside down.
History Select the number of days you want the computer to store
labels so you can reprint them if needed.
Include Stainer Type Prefix If your lab uses more than one type of instrument, select this
with Protocol Number check box to have the stainer type specified on slide labels.
Translate Barcode Reader Select this check box to automatically advance to the next
Delimiter to Entry Field template field when using a bar code scanner for entering data
Advance into fields.

Update SLS for a New Label Roll or Ribbon

When you load a new label roll or label ribbon onto the label printer, you need to update the SLS options. The
computer tracks and calculates the number of labels left on the roll or ribbon. For more information about the
printer and loading labels, see Label Printer, page 141.
2. Click the SLS Options tab.
3. Do one of the following:
• When you add a new label roll, click the New 520 label roll button.
• When you add a new label ribbon, click either the New 2500 label ribbon button or the New 8100 label
ribbon button, depending on the product you use.
4. Enter the date the new label roll or ribbon was loaded onto the printer.
Cancel Setup Changes

If you change any of the host computer setup options, you can cancel the changes before you click the Save
button.
1. In the Setup Host options, on any of the option tabs, click the Cancel button.
2. The system prompts you to verify that you want to ignore the changes.
Restore the Default Setup

You can go back to the original software settings for any of the host computer setup options.
1. In the Setup Host options, on any of the option tabs, click the Restore Default button.
2. The system prompts you to verify that you want to return the options to the original settings.
Set Up User Accounts

You can assign a user name and password for each operator and also assign them to a user group. You can also
specify the system functions a operator can access in the system software.
About User Names and Passwords

The Administrator Account
A default Administrator account allows you to manage operators’ names, passwords, and system privileges.
The Administrator account cannot be deleted and has full privileges for all software functions. The
Administrator account is the only one that can edit templates in SLS. Make sure the Administrator account
password is set up before you set up user names and passwords for other users.
24814EN Rev E 233

Passwords
Log-in passwords control access to the system software and specify the tasks an operator is allowed to do—for
example, add or modify protocols, print labels and reports, or approve quality control results.
A sign-off password allows operators to sign off on error messages that appear in the Communicator. The sign-
off password appears on the Run Report and the Case Report.
You activate log-in password checking or sign-off password checking in the Security tab in Setup Host. Define
user names and passwords first and then activate the password feature.
Log-in and sign-off passwords are optional. Either, both, or neither may be required. For each operator, the two
passwords may be the same or different. When passwords are required, the functions available to each operator
will be determined by the authorizations associated with that operator’s user name and password. Menu items
for which an operator does not have privileges will not be displayed. Ventana recommends that if any operator
is required to enter a password, all operators be required to enter passwords.
When a password is typed in, an asterisk (*) appears for each keystroke, instead of the actual letters entered, to
prevent someone from ascertaining the password. Passwords are associated with time limits; operators may be
automatically logged out when the system is inactive and will need to re-enter their user names and passwords
to log back in.
System Privileges
When you set up system privileges, assign the Setup Users and Setup Host options only to trusted operators.
The Setup Users privilege activates user names and passwords, and the Setup Host privilege enables Log-in
Password checking and Sign-off Password checking. Anyone authorized to change these options can easily
give anyone access to any function or change user names and passwords. Only the Administrator or operators
with Setup Host privileges can turn off password checking. Other functions that you might want to assign only
to trusted operators include Protocol Editing, access to Inventory functions, and designing slide label
templates.
User Groups
To give the same system privileges to a group of users, you can define a user group. When you set up user
names for operators, you can assign them both individual system privileges and user group privileges. When a
group to which a user currently belongs is deleted, the user no longer has the group privileges (unless the
privileges were also assigned to the individual).
Add a User Name and Password

1. At the Home View, click the Setup button, and then click Setup Users.
Figure 246. Set Up Names and Passwords

2. To enter a new user name, click the Add button. The Enter a Unique User Name dialog box appears. Type
the user name the operator will use to log in to the system, and then click the Save button. (If the name you
enter is already in the system, the Save button remains inactive. Enter a different name that is not already
in use.)
3. The name you saved appears under User Name. You can set the following options.
Option What To Do
User Group Click the listbox arrow to select a user group to associate with the user
name. Privileges assigned to the user group appear with check marks.
Login Password Type the password the operator uses to enter the system and then re-
type it to verify it.
Sign-Off Password Type the password the operator uses to sign off on errors in the
Communicator and then re-type it to verify it.
Left-Handed Mouse Click the check box to specify mouse actions for a left-handed user.
Privileges Click check boxes to indicate the tasks the user can perform. Ventana
recommends that Setup Host and Setup Users privileges be assigned
only to trusted operators.
• Click the Set All button to permit access to all system functions.
• Click the Clear All button to remove access to all system functions.
NOTE: For users that have been trained to use the Ultimate
Reagent Access feature and to whom you would like to assign
reagent management privileges, scroll down to the bottom of the
list of privileges and select the Manage Reagent Access Points
check box
4. Click the Save button to save the user name, password, and privileges.
Change a User Name and Password

2. Under User Name, click the listbox arrow to select a user name and password, and then do any of the
following:
• Click the Rename button to change the user name. The system prompts you to enter the new name and
save it.
• Type a new password.
• Click a check box to select a system privilege.
• Click the Set All button to select all system functions for this user.
• Click the Clear All button to remove all system functions for this user.
3. When you are finished, click the Save button. The system prompts you to save the changes.
24814EN Rev E 235

Delete a User Name and Password

2. Under User Name, click the listbox arrow to select the user name you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete button. The system prompts you to verify the deletion.
Add a User Group

2. Click Setup Users, and then click the User Groups tab.
Figure 247. Set Up User Groups
3. Click the Add button to enter a new user group. The Enter a Unique User Group Name dialog box appears.
Type the name and click the Save button. The name you entered appears under User Group Name.
4. Under Privileges, do any of the following:
• Click the Set All button to select all system functions for this user group.
• Click the Clear All button to remove all system functions for this user group.
Change a User Group

3. Under User Group Name, click the listbox arrow to select a user group, and then do any of the following:
• Click the Rename button to change the user group name. The system prompts you to enter the new
name and save it.
• Click the Set All button to select all system functions for this user group.
• Click the Clear All button to remove all system functions for this user group.

Delete a User Group

3. Under User Group Name, click the listbox arrow to select a user group, and then click the Delete button.
The system prompts you to verify the deletion.
Look Up User Names or Groups

2. Click Setup Users, and then do one of the following:
• To view user names and passwords, click the Users tab. Under User Name, click the listbox arrow to
view a user name and the user’s system privileges.
• To view user groups, click the User Group tab. Under User Group Name, click the listbox arrow to
view a user group and the user group’s system privileges.
Manage Contacts
You can enter contact information for service engineers and other people you need to be in contact with. You
can also print a list of contacts to refer to if you need to call a service engineer.
View or Change Contact Information

2. Click Contact Management, and then click the Contact Select tab to view the list of contacts.
Figure 248. View the Contact List
3. Use the following features to see the contact records.
24814EN Rev E 237

Option What To Do
1 Click the first arrow button to see the first record. Click the last arrow button to see
the last record.
2 Click the left arrow to see the previous record. Click the right arrow to advance to the
next record.
3 Click a heading with the mouse and drag it to a new position to reorganize the table.
4 Click the up or down arrow to scroll through the list.
5 Click a letter to sort the list alphabetically.
4. To change contact information, double-click the record. The Contact Edit form opens.
Figure 249. Add or Change Contact Information
5. Change the information, and then click the Save button.
Add a Contact
1. At the Home View, click the Setup button, and then click Contact Management.
2. If this is the first entry for contact information, the Contact Edit form appears and you can begin entering
contact information. If the Edit form does not appear, click the Contact Edit tab, and then click the Add
button.
3. Type in the name, phone number, email address, and other information you want to include.
4. Click the Save button. Your entries are saved and appear in the Contact Select list.
Delete a Contact
2. In the Contact Select list, click the contact you want to delete, and then click the Delete button. You are
prompted to verify the deletion.
Print Contact Information

2. In the Contact Select list, click a contact, and then click the Contact Edit tab. The information appears for
the selected contact.
3. Click the Print Form button to print a form for this contact.

Print a List of Contacts

2. Click the Contact Select tab, and then click the Print List button.
24814EN Rev E 239


CHAPTER 20
Cleaning and Maintenance
About Cleaning and Maintenance

Instrument care requires a combination of manual actions and software functions.
• Instrument Maintenance provides tools to print maintenance logs, record completed tasks, schedule
preventive maintenance, and decontaminate the instrument. It includes service tests and function tests used
to analyze system performance and diagnose problems.
• Maintenance provides tools to manage data and maintain the host computer.
Go to Instrument Maintenance
The Instrument Maintenance View provides tools to maintain your BenchMark ULTRA instruments and
generate maintenance logs and reports. This section tells you how to go to the Instrument Maintenance View.
Detailed steps for maintenance tasks are provided in later sections.
1. Click the instrument name in the Instrument Bar to open the Instrument View.
Figure 250. Instrument Maintenance Icon in Instrument View
2. At the Instrument View, click the Instrument Maintenance icon to open the Instrument Maintenance View.
Figure 251. Instrument Maintenance View
24814EN Rev E 241

20 Cleaning and Maintenance BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Go to Maintenance
The Maintenance View provides tools to manage the data on your host computer. This section tells you how to
go to the Maintenance View. Detailed steps for maintenance tasks are provided in later sections.
1. At the Home View, click the Maintenance button.
Figure 252. Maintenance Button in the Home View
2. At the Maintenance View, you can click buttons and tabs to manage maintenance on your host computer.
Figure 253. Maintenance View
Maintenance Check List

The maintenance check list below includes both instrument maintenance and host computer maintenance tasks.
Task Daily Weekly Monthly Quarterly
Wipe External Surfaces X
Back Up the Database X
Clean Slide Drawers As needed*
Run Database Maintenance X
Rinse Bulk Fluid Containers X
Wash and Brush Slide Heating Pads X
Clean Waste Tub and Drain X
Run Slide Heater Temperature Verifiers X
Decontaminate the instrument X
Decontaminate EZ Prep X
Decontaminate SSC X

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 20 Cleaning and Maintenance
Task Daily Weekly Monthly Quarterly
Decontaminate Reaction Buffer X
Decontaminate ULTRA CC1 X
Decontaminate ULTRA CC2 X
Decontaminate Optional X
Defragment the Hard Disk X
Preventive maintenance Scheduled according to service contract.
*Cleaning slide drawers as needed is generally done once per day, before the first run or after
the last run.
Print User Maintenance Logs

At the start of each month, you can print the Daily User Maintenance Log, then attach it to the instrument and
check off tasks when they are completed. You can also print the monthly and quarterly logs.
1. Go to Instrument Maintenance View.
2. Select Maintenance Report, and then click the Daily, Monthly, or Quarterly Schedule tab.
Figure 254. Maintenance Report
3. In the list boxes, select the instrument and year, then select a report month.
4. Click Print Report. Print Preview opens. To print the report, click the Printer icon in the toolbar.
Figure 255. Monthly User Maintenance Log
Record Completed Maintenance

After you complete an instrument maintenance task, check off the task in User Maintenance.
24814EN Rev E 243

1. In Instrument Maintenance, click User Maintenance, and then click the tab for the appropriate maintenance
period.
Figure 256. Record User Maintenance Monthly
2. Click the box next to each task you have completed.

3. Click the Save button. You will be prompted to confirm that you want to save the information.
About Decontamination Tasks

Decontamination tasks are automatically scheduled to be done once every three months. When you complete a
decontamination task, it is automatically recorded, and the record can be viewed in the Quarterly Maintenance
Report. Upon completion, each task is automatically rescheduled for the next quarterly maintenance. (See
Decontamination Record, page 253.)
View or Add Maintenance Notes

When you check off maintenance tasks, you can add or edit maintenance notes.
1. In Instrument Maintenance, click User Maintenance, and then click the tab for the appropriate maintenance
period.
2. Click the Edit Notes button. The form opens.
3. In User Maintenance Notes, click the direction buttons or scroll arrows to read through existing notes. To
add a note, click the New Note button, type the note in the box, and then click the Save button.
Figure 257. User Maintenance Notes
Daily Maintenance
Wipe External Surfaces
Wipe external surfaces of the instrument with a soft, damp cloth.

Disinfect Waste Containers

Waste containers can be continuously disinfected by adding 40 mL of a disinfectant solution such as Lysol IC
or equivalent to each bottle after it is emptied.
Clean Slide Drawers

Ventana recommends cleaning the slide drawers as needed. Drawers are cleaned using the instrument test
function named TEST–CLEAN SLIDE DRWRS ULTRA. The function cleans all 30 drawers at once. The nozzle plate
passes over the slide drawers dispensing pulses of EZ Prep and then the drawers are heated to dry them. The
whole process takes approximately 12 minutes.
When cleaning begins, the waste containers and drawers are locked, and the slide drawer lights and software
slide status indicators turn yellow. The Communicator displays a message saying the test is running. When the
test is finished, the waste containers are unlocked, the drawer lights turn off, and the Communicator displays a
test completed message. The drawers are then ready to use again.
1. Click the instrument name or image to open the Instrument View.
2. Make sure:
• The instrument is in Ready mode and all slide drawers are empty.
• The waste containers have sufficient space. (Each cleaning will generate about 1 cup (240 mL) of
waste.)
• The EZ Prep bottle has sufficient fluid. (If fluid is not sufficient, the reagent status indicator in the
Instrument Bar will turn red and an error message will appear in the Communicator.)
3. In Instrument View, click the Instrument Maintenance icon.
4. In Instrument Maintenance, click Function Tests, select TEST–CLEAN SLIDE DRWRS ULTRA, and then click the
Run button. The download progress message appears as the test downloads, and then cleaning begins.
Figure 258. Clean Slide Drawers
5. When cleaning is finished, the drawer lights turn off and a test completed message appears in the
Communicator. Click the Sign-off button to clear the message. The instrument is ready for use.
24814EN Rev E 245

Using the Clean Icon

You can also start a slide drawer’s cleaning cycle with one mouse click by using the Clean icon.
The Clean icon is located under the Instrument Maintenance icon on the far left side of the user interface screen
and can be accessed through the Instrument, Reagent Histogram, and Slide Histogram Views. The instrument
must be in sleep mode to run a clean cycle.
Figure 259. The Clean Icon in the Instrument View
Clean Icon Status

The Clean icon changes color to indicate if the Clean function is disabled, available, or running. You can still
access the Clean function within the maintenance menu, if desired.
Clean Icon Status Description
Disabled The system is in READY or RUNNING mode, and you cannot

run a clean cycle. (Note: If required, you can still access the
Clean function within the maintenance menu.)
Available The system is in SLEEP mode, and you can run a cleaning
cycle.
Running An instrument cleaning is being performed.
Starting a Cleaning Cycle Using the Clean Icon

1. Make sure:
• The instrument is in Sleep mode.
• All slides are removed from the slide drawers.
• All slide drawers are in the closed position.
• The waste containers have sufficient space. (Each cleaning will generate about 1 cup (240 mL) of
waste.)
• The EZ Prep bottle has sufficient fluid. (If fluid is not sufficient, the reagent status indicator in the
Instrument Bar will turn red and an error message will appear in the Communicator.)
2. From the Instrument, Reagent Histogram, or Slide Histogram Views, check the Clean icon to see if the
Clean function is available.

3. Click the Clean icon to perform a cleaning cycle. Once the instrument begins a cleaning cycle, the Clean
icon and slides turn amber in the Instrument View. The cleaning cycle will take approximately 12 minutes
to complete.
Figure 260. Instrument View with the Cleaning Cycle Running
Aborting a Cleaning Cycle

If you need to abort a cleaning cycle, follow the steps below:
1. Click the Abort Test Function located on the bottom left corner of the Instrument View screen.
2. Verify that the system has returned to Ready mode as indicated by the disabled clean icon.
Weekly Maintenance
Back Up the Database
IMPORTANT: Ventana recommends backing up the database every week to maintain data integrity
and optimal performance.
1. Go to Maintenance, and then click the Backup Database button. The system displays the following
message.
Figure 261. Database Backup Progress
2. Wait for the backup to finish or click the Cancel button to end without finishing.
24814EN Rev E 247

Run Database Maintenance

Go to Maintenance, and then click the Database Maintenance button. The system displays the following
message. Wait for maintenance to finish or click the Cancel button.
Figure 262. Database Maintenance
Monthly Maintenance
Rinse Bulk Fluid Containers
1. Empty the residual fluids out of the EZ Prep,
SSC, ULTRA CC1, ULTRA CC2, Optional,
and Reaction Buffer bottles.
2. Rinse the bottles with deionized (DI) water.
3. Refill the bottles with their original fluids.
Figure 263. Empty and Fill Bulk Bottles
Wash and Brush Slide Heating Pads

1. Set the instrument to Ready mode.
2. Empty the waste containers.
CAUTION: Handle filled waste containers carefully. Wheel the carboy to the disposal area instead of
lifting it. To prevent spillage, place the cap on the carboy before removing it from the instrument.
3. Prepare a soapy water solution, using warm tap water and mild liquid dishwashing detergent (or
equivalent).
4. Brush the pads lightly using the soapy water and the instrument cleaning brush supplied with the system.
5. Proceed to the Clean Waste Tub and Drain section.

Clean Waste Tub and Drain

1. Set the instrument to Ready
mode.
2. Make sure the waste
containers have room for the
cleaning water.
3. Brush the waste tub lightly
using the soapy water and
the instrument cleaning
brush supplied with the
system.
4. Run the Clean cycle to rinse
the instrument thoroughly.
Figure 264. Clean the Waste Tub
Quarterly Maintenance
Run Slide Heater Temperature Verifiers
For this test, you use temperature verification slides to check the slide heater temperatures.
CAUTION: To keep verification slide temperature indicators from turning black:

• Clean the oil off the bottom of each slide before you stack the slides for storage.
• Don’t run finished slides through an automatic coverslipper.
1. Load all temperature verification slides onto the instrument and close all slide drawers.
2. Go to Instrument Maintenance, and then click Function Tests.
Figure 265. Run Temperature Verifiers
3. Select TEST–TEMP VERIFY ULTRA and click the Run button. When the test runs, all slide drawers are heated to
95 degrees C for 10 minutes and then cooled. On each slide, the bar that represents 93 degrees C should
have turned black, and the bar that represents 99 degrees C should be unchanged.
24814EN Rev E 249

Decontaminate Bulk Fluid Bottles

When you decontaminate the instrument and bulk fluid reservoirs, decontaminate the bulk fluid bottles as well.
1. Empty the residual fluids out of the EZ Prep, SSC, ULTRA CC1, ULTRA CC2, Optional, and Reaction
Buffer bottles. Do not empty the ULTRA LCS bottle unless instructed by Ventana technical support
personnel.
2. Rinse the bottles at least twice with DI water.
3. Pour at least 1 liter of sterilizing solution into each of the seven bottles. (Ventana recommends using a
disinfectant solution such as Lysol IC or equivalent.)
4. Replace the cap on each bottle. Wearing gloves, cover the air vent in the cap with your finger and swish
fluid around inside until all surfaces are wet. Leave the fluid in the bottle for at least 10 minutes.
5. Empty the bottles and dispose of the sterilizing solution appropriately.
6. Rinse each bottle with DI water at least twice (until the sterilizing fluid odor is gone). Make sure the
bottle’s whole interior is rinsed.
7. Refill the bottles with fresh bulk fluids and replace the caps.
8. Replace the freshly filled bulk reagent bottles on the instrument. Make sure the connectors snap into place.
Decontaminate Bulk Fluid Reservoirs

Every bulk fluid reservoir should be decontaminated at least once every 90 days. The system schedules
decontamination automatically and displays an alert when decontamination is due.
The instrument cannot process slides during decontamination. It must be in Sleep mode, with all slides and
reagents removed.
Decontamination Alert
When any reservoir is due for decontamination, the Instrument Maintenance icon in the Instrument View turns
red. It will stay red until all scheduled reservoirs are decontaminated. It doesn’t have to be red for
decontamination to run.
Figure 266. Decontamination Alert in Instrument View
How Decontamination Works

Decontamination is partly automated and partly done by the operator. The operator prepares the instrument and
fluids, specifies the decontamination method, selects reservoirs to be included, starts the process, and provides
fluids as needed. The system pumps the fluids into and out of the reservoirs, monitors the process, and alerts
the operator when actions are required.
There are 12 steps in the decontamination process.

• Initialization (system prepares AFS and nozzle plate).

• Draining Ventana fluids.
• Waiting for decontamination fluid (operator action required).
• Filling with decontamination fluid.
• Incubating with decontamination fluid.
• Draining decontamination fluid.
• Waiting for deionized (DI) water (operator action required).
• Filling with DI water.
• Draining DI water.
• Waiting for Ventana fluids (operator action required).
• Filling with Ventana fluids.
• Priming with Ventana fluids.
A decontamination status indicator shows the current step for each
selected reservoir. As a step begins, the status marker turns yellow.
When the step is completed, the marker turns green.
As fluid is pumped in and out, the fill level in the reservoir image
changes to reflect progress. The color changes to represent the type
of fluid.
Figure 267. Decontamination Status Marker
During decontamination, a decontamination icon is displayed in the Instrument Bar and Home View. After the
icon disappears, you can resume slide processing.
Figure 268. Decontamination Indicator
Two Decontamination Methods

At the Decontamination View, you select one of two methods.
• Pump fluids from a single source attached to all bottle connectors (Tubing Manifold method). This method
cleans all reservoirs at once and requires less handling.
• Feed fluids into the reservoirs from individual bulk bottles (Bottles method). This method lets you
decontaminate selected reservoirs when their fluid levels are low in order to reduce waste.
If You Need to Stop Decontamination

After decontamination starts, the Abort button is activated. You can click it at any time.
• If you click Abort before decontamination fluid is pumped into the system, the process stops. You can
replace the bulk fluids and resume slide processing.
24814EN Rev E 251

• If you click Abort after decontamination fluid is pumped into the system, the process pauses, but is not
terminated. You must finish decontaminating before you can process slides. To continue, correct the
condition that caused you to click Abort, then click the Continue button. Depending on where it was in the
process, the system will resume where it left off or start over. It will update the reservoir status markers and
display information in the message window to let you know what it is doing and what you need to do.
What You Need for Decontamination
Method Approx. Time Equipment and Fluids
Bottles Single reservoir: 1 hour Decontamination fluid (Ventana recommends using

disinfectant solution such as Lysol IC or equivalent):
All reservoirs: 2.5 hours
• CC1 and CC2—1.5 liters each.
• EZ Prep, SSC, and Optional—3 liters each.
• Left reaction buffer—5.5 liters.
• Right reaction buffer—1 liter.
DI water:
• CC1 and CC2—1.5 liters each.
• EZ Prep, SSC, and Optional—3 liters each.
• Left reaction buffer—5.5 liters.
• Right reaction buffer—1 liter.
Funnel.
Personal protective equipment.
Fresh bulk reagents.
Tubing 2.5 hours Tubing manifold.

Manifold
20 liters of decontamination fluid (Ventana
recommends using a disinfectant solution such as
Lysol IC or equivalent).
Large carboy (20 liters or more).
20 liters of deionized (DI) water.
Personal protective equipment.
Fresh bulk reagents.
CAUTION: To prevent spillage, place caps on waste carboys before removing them from the
instrument. Wheel the carboys to the disposal area to avoid lifting them.
IMPORTANT: The decontamination process will generate from 1 to 40 liters of waste or more,
depending on how full the bulk reservoirs are when you start and how many reservoirs are
decontaminated. If the waste containers are full, the process will stop until they are emptied and
replaced.

Decontamination Record
Decontamination is automatically recorded in the Quarterly Maintenance Log. After decontamination, the
report appears on the screen, showing a check mark for each reservoir that was cleaned.
Figure 269. Decontamination Record
When the tubing harness method is used, all bulk reagents are checked off on the log. When the individual
bottles method is used, only the bulk reagents selected for decontamination are checked. You can view or print
the report like any other maintenance report.
Figure 270. Logged Decontamination
Prepare the Instrument for Decontamination

For either decontamination method, prepare the instrument before you begin.
1. Make sure the Ventana System Software is running.
2. Make sure the instrument is turned on, connected, and idle. (To set the instrument to idle, go to the
Instrument View and click the Sleep button.)
3. Remove all slides and reagent dispensers from the slide drawers and carousel. (No slides can be processed
during decontamination, so the slide and reagent histograms are deactivated.)
4. Empty and replace both waste containers.
24814EN Rev E 253

Decontaminate Reservoirs Using Tubing

1. Prepare the instrument, equipment and fluids (see What You Need for Decontamination, page 252, and
Prepare the Instrument for Decontamination, page 253).
2. Remove all bulk bottles (except Liquid Coverslip, Position 2 which will not be cleaned in this process) and
empty the residual fluids.
3. Rinse the bottles at least twice with DI water.
4. Pour at least 1 liter of sterilizing solution into each of the seven bottles. (Ventana recommends using a
disinfectant solution such as Lysol IC or equivalent.) Replace the cap on each bottle. Wearing gloves,
cover the air vent in the cap with your finger and swish fluid around inside until all surfaces are wet. Leave
the bottles to soak with decontamination fluid for at least 10 minutes.
5. Connect the tubing manifold connectors
(numbered 1-8) to the corresponding bulk fluid
connectors (1 and 3-7). Make sure the quick
connects have snapped into place.
6. Mix at least 20 liters of decontamination fluid in
the large carboy.
7. Set the carboy on the floor in front of the
instrument. Insert the long tube on the tubing
harness into the carboy. Make sure the end of the
tube rests on the bottom of the carboy.
Figure 271. Decontamination Tubing Manifold
8. At the computer, go to the Instrument View and click the Instrument Maintenance icon.
Figure 272. Instrument View Instrument Maintenance Icon
9. At Instrument Maintenance, click the Decontamination button to open the Decontamination View.

Figure 273. Decontaminate Using Tubing
10. Under Fluid Connection Method, click Tubing Manifold. All of the Select Bulks to Decontaminate boxes
are checked automatically (except LCS, which is not included in the process). The Start button is activated.
11. Set the Incubation Time by clicking the up or down arrow. The correct time depends on the
decontamination fluids you use and your laboratory practices.
12. Click the Start button.
The system initializes the AFS and nozzle plate, evaluates the volume of fluids to be drained, and checks
the capacity of waste containers. (If there is not enough room for the waste, the system pauses, alerts the
operator, and displays a message. Empty and replace the waste containers. The system will automatically
resume processing.) When initialization is complete, the top status marker turns green. The second marker
turns yellow as fluids start to drain.
NOTE: Reservoirs drain two at a time, except ULTRA CC1 and CC2. They drain along with the others,
but through a different opening, so their progress might appear slower.
After the selected reservoirs are drained, the third status marker turns yellow. The person icon indicates
that operator action is required. The system alerts the operator and displays a message. The Start button
becomes the Continue button.
13. Make sure the tubing manifold is attached to the bulk connectors, and the free end is inserted in the large
carboy of decontamination fluid. Click the Continue button.
Decontamination fluid is pumped through the tubing into the reservoirs, and the incubation time begins.
The percentage of incubation completed is shown on the Incubation Progress bar.
14. While the reservoirs are soaking:
• Empty the decontamination fluid from the large carboy. Rinse the carboy at least twice with DI water,
and then refill it with at least 20 liters of DI water.
• Remove the tubing harness from the instrument. Rinse it inside and out with DI water to prevent cross
contamination.
24814EN Rev E 255

15. When the incubation time has passed, the system drains the decontamination fluid and signals the operator
to provide DI water. Reconnect the tubing harness to the bulk connectors, set the large carboy filled with
DI water in front of the instrument, and insert the long tube into the carboy. Click the Continue button.
16. Empty the bulk fluid bottles and dispose of the sterilizing solution appropriately. Rinse each bottle with DI
water at least twice (until the sterilizing fluid odor is gone). Make sure the bottle’s whole interior is rinsed.
Refill the bottles with fresh bulk fluids and replace the caps.
17. When the system starts draining the DI water from the reservoirs, remove the tubing manifold from the
bulk connectors and empty any remaining DI water out of the large carboy.
18. When the DI water has drained, the system signals the operator and displays a message. Replace the freshly
filled bulk reagent bottles on the instrument. Make sure the connectors snap into place. Click the Continue
button.
The system fills the reservoir with the VENTANA fluids, then primes the lines. The Start button is
reactivated, and the instrument is ready to use. The system automatically records the date for each reservoir
that was decontaminated and displays the Quarterly User Maintenance Log (see Decontamination Record,
page 253).
Decontaminate Reservoirs Using Bottles

1. Prepare the instrument, equipment and fluids (see What You Need for Decontamination, page 252, and
Prepare the Instrument for Decontamination, page 253).
2. Remove the bottle for each bulk reservoir that you want to decontaminate. (Liquid Coverslip, Position 2,
will not be cleaned in this process).
3. If you are decontaminating the Reaction Buffer, remove the connection between the two bottles.
4. Empty all of the bottles and rinse them with DI water at least twice.
5. Using the funnel, pour decontamination fluid into the bottles.
Bottle Amount of Decontamination Fluid
EZ Prep, SSC, and Optional 3 liters per bottle
ULTRA CC1 and ULTRA CC2 1.5 liters per bottle
Left Reaction Buffer 5.5 liters
Right Reaction Buffer 1 liter
6. Replace the cap on each bottle. Wearing gloves, cover the air vent in the cap with your finger and swish the
fluid around in the bottle to wet the whole interior.
7. At the computer, go to the Instrument View and click the Instrument Maintenance icon.

Figure 274. Instrument View Instrument Maintenance Icon
8. At Instrument Maintenance, click the Decontamination button to open the Decontamination View. The
status indicators for the removed bulk bottles appear red with lines above and below them.
Figure 275. Decontamination View
9. Under Fluid Connection Method, select Bottles.

Reservoirs due for decontamination have red selection buttons. Reservoirs that have been decontaminated
in the past 90 days have green selection buttons. You can select any reservoir, regardless of whether the
button is red or green.
10. Click the boxes to check mark the bulks you want to decontaminate and uncheck those you don’t want to
decontaminate. When any box is checked, the Start button is activated.
24814EN Rev E 257

11. Set the Incubation Time by clicking the up or down arrow. The correct time depends on the
decontamination fluids you use and your laboratory practices.
12. Click the Start button.
The system initializes the AFS and nozzle plate, evaluates the volume of fluids to be drained, and checks
the capacity of waste containers. (If there is not enough room for the waste, the system pauses, alerts the
operator, and displays a message. Empty and replace the waste containers. The system will automatically
resume processing.) When initialization is complete, the top status marker turns green. The second marker
turns yellow as fluids start to drain.
NOTE: Reservoirs drain two at a time, except ULTRA CC1 and CC2. They drain along with the others,
but through a different opening, so their progress might appear slower.
After the selected reservoirs are drained, the third status marker turns yellow. The person icon indicates
that operator action is required. The system alerts the operator and displays a message. The Start button
becomes the Continue button.
13. Re-install the bulk bottles on the instrument. Make sure the connectors snap into place. (Do not reconnect
the Reaction Buffer bottles.) Click the Continue button.
Decontamination fluid is pumped from the bottles into the reservoirs, and the incubation time begins. The
percentage of incubation completed is shown on the Incubation Progress bar.
14. Remove the bottles from the instrument and empty any remaining decontamination fluid. Rinse each bottle
with DI water at least twice.
15. Using the funnel, pour DI water into the bottles. Replace the caps on the bottles.
Bottle Amount of DI Water
EZ Prep, SSC, and Optional 3 liters per bottle
ULTRA CC1 and ULTRA CC2 1.5 liters per bottle
Left Reaction Buffer 5.5 liters
Right Reaction Buffer 1 liter
16. When the incubation time has passed, the system drains the decontamination fluid and signals the operator
to provide DI water. Return the bulk bottles to their places on the instrument. Make sure the connections
snap into place. (Do not reconnect the Reaction Buffer bottles.) Click the Continue button.
17. When the system starts draining DI water from the reservoirs, remove the bulk bottles from the instrument.
Pour out any remaining DI water and fill the bottles with fresh VENTANA fluids.
18. When the DI water has drained, the system signals the operator and displays a message. Replace the freshly
filled bulk reagent bottles on the instrument. Make sure the connectors snap into place. Reconnect the
Reaction Buffer bottles. Click the Continue button.
The systems fills the reservoir with the VENTANA fluids, then primes the lines. The Start button is
reactivated, and the instrument is ready to use. The system automatically records the date for each reservoir
that was decontaminated and displays the Quarterly User Maintenance Log (see Decontamination Record,
page 253).

Database Management
Use the Maintenance options to archive system data, back up the database, and analyze the database for errors.
How the System Archives Data

Archiving saves a current snapshot of the system data onto a drive (a local drive, network drive, or external
USB flash drive) and then purges historical system data from the current database located on the host
computer. The archiving process saves the system data to a temporary folder and then creates the archive
before purging the data. If at any time the archive process fails, the original system data will be intact.
Archiving the database should be done several times a year to ensure optimum software performance.
NOTE: Databases that have not been archived in a very long time may take several hours or longer to
complete the archive process.
NOTE: Systems connected via Central Management must be archived in succession and before a run
is started. Failure to archive all systems connected via Central Management will result in data being
auto-populated and a potential loss of archive data.
The archive includes system data for cases, blocks, run data, and dispensers.
For this What is Archived
Cases Deactivated cases will be archived and purged.
Blocks Deactivated blocks will be archived and purged.
Run Data Run information, including used dispensers, will be archived starting
at the Archive Date, and only if the dispensers used within those runs
are also targeted to be archived and purged.
Dispensers All exhausted, expired, and deactivated dispensers will be archived

and purged, starting at the archive date.
NOTE: Dispensers that have been used on runs which completed

after the archive date will not be included in the archive and purge.
24814EN Rev E 259

Archive System Data

1. Go to Maintenance, and then click the Archive System Data button.
Figure 276. Archive System Data
2. Select options to archive system data.
Option What To Do
Archive Date Click the arrow and select a date. All system data up to this date will be
archived onto the network or external USB flash drive.
Blocks Click the check box to include deactivated blocks in the archive data and
purge them from the system. Click the check box again to clear it and
remove blocks from the archive data.
Cases Click the check box to include deactivated cases in the archive data and
purge them from the system. Click the check box again to clear it and
remove cases from the archive data.
Create Disk Select the check box to create an archive disk that is used to view the
archive data. The archive disk includes all data up to the archive date
and then purges the old data from the computer. Ventana recommends
that you select this option and create an archive disk.
If this option is not selected, no archive disk is created and the old data is
purged from the computer.

3. In the Archive Folder field, type the drive letter and folder name of where you want to save the data or
click the Archive Folder arrow to open the Select Folder panel.
Figure 277. Archive Location Field
Figure 278. Select Archive Folder
4. In the Select Folder panel, you can do any or all of the following:
• Navigate to the drive and folder where you want to save the archive.
• If needed, click the Create New Folder button (1), and then type a new folder name (2).
• Click OK to close the Select Folder panel.
• Open the Select Folder panel again and change your selection.
• Click in the Archive Folder field, erase the current name, and type a new one.
5. Click the Archive button to start the back up. After the file is saved, you can see it in Windows Explorer.
24814EN Rev E 261

View the Archive Data

1. Close the VSS software.
NOTE: If you want to view the archive file on a computer that is running the VSS software, you must
close the software prior to opening the archive. The system will not allow VSS and an archive data file
to run simultaneously.
2. Navigate to the drive and folder where the Archive disk is saved.
3. Double-click on the Archive disk.
4. A message appears that lists the archive date, software version, and Host ID. Click OK to continue.
Figure 279. View Archive Data
5. A software program opens that is similar to the VSS so you can view the archived system data. To generate
reports from the archived data, go to the Home View and click the Reports button.
Defragment the Hard Disk

The system stores information on the hard disk wherever there is empty space. As a result, information that
belongs together sometimes gets copied to many separate locations, and the disk becomes fragmented. Then
the system has to retrieve fragments from all their locations to assemble the information. A badly fragmented
disk can slow down your system. It might also overwork the disk drive, causing excessive wear. Defragmenting
the hard disk reorganizes data, putting all the bits that go together in the same place. The defragmentation
program is part of the Windows operating system.
1. In the Windows Explorer, select the C: drive.
2. Click File and select Properties from the list.
3. Click the Tools tab, and then click the Defragment Now button. The system analyzes the C: drive and tells
you if defragmentation is needed.

4. If defragmentation is needed, click the Defragment button and wait for the process to complete. It could
take a few minutes or a few hours. A completion message will be displayed when the process is finished.
Figure 280. Windows Defragment Button and Monitor
Preventive Maintenance
About Preventive Maintenance
Regular preventive maintenance is done by a Ventana technician or a Ventana-certified technician at your
facility. It includes instrument calibration and other tests and tuning that are more technical than routine user
maintenance. Preventive maintenance is scheduled based on time or number of slides processed. The interval
for each facility is determined by its service contract. The time interval may be 2 weeks, 6 months, 12 months,
or 18 months. The slides processed interval may be 2000, 3000, 6000, or 9000 slides. The most common
intervals are 12 months and 12000 slides.
The customer monitors the preventive maintenance schedule and calls the Ventana Customer Service Center
(CSC) when maintenance is due. After the maintenance is done, the technician reports it to the CSC and resets
the schedule for the next maintenance.
Schedule Preventive Maintenance

1. Click the instrument name in the Instrument bar. At the Instrument View, click the Instrument
Maintenance icon, and then click Schedule Preventive Maintenance.
Figure 281. Schedule Preventive Maintenance
2. (Customer) If maintenance is due, call the Ventana CSC and schedule a visit.
3. (Technician) After the maintenance is done, go to Schedule Preventive Maintenance and click the Yes
button. A challenge code is displayed.
24814EN Rev E 263

Figure 282. Preventive Maintenance Challenge Code
4. (Technician) Call the CSC and tell them the code. Type the response code into the Response Code box, and
then click the Apply button. The time for the next service is calculated according to the service contract,
and the schedule numbers and dates are reset.

CHAPTER 21
Customization
Label Templates
A template is a set of instructions that define how a label looks when it is printed. You can design up to 25
templates. The Ventana System Software includes a set of predefined templates that you can customize for
your facility. You can also specify which template is used during label printing. For more information about
printing slide labels, see Generate Slide Labels, page 73.
VENTANA instruments only require a bar code and protocol name on templates. When you design a template,
you can specify the font size and field names that appear during label printing.
Figure 283. Design Label Options
Feature Description
1 Font Size Style Set the font size used on the label.
2 Field and User Design field labels and user prompts.

Prompt Definitions
3 Protocol Name Default option that appears on every label.
4 Bar Code Default option that appears on every label.
24814EN Rev E 265

21 Customization BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Create a New Label Template

1. At the Home view, click the Create Label button. SLS opens.
2. Click the Template button. The Design Label view opens.
3. Click the New button. Type the name of the template, and then click the Save button. The name of the new
template appears in the Label Name field.
Set the Font Size

You can set the font size for the label. The default entry is small font. To change it, open the Style list and
select a font size.
Select the Field and Line Dimensions

You can include one field or two fields per line on the label template. A single field on a label may use up to 17
characters. If you use two fields, each field will be truncated to eight characters.
1. Click the Fields button to see the field and line options.
2. Set the field and line options.
Option What To Do
No Fields Click this if you want to remove a field from the label.
One/Two Fields Select one or two fields per line for the user prompt.
Insert New Line Click this to insert a line at the bottom of the label.
Delete Line Use this option to delete the current line.
Move Line Up/ Click this to move the current line up or down.
Down
Open the Field Properties View

Field Properties allow you to format the label and add a prompt and text entry box, a list, or a date. The option
you select replaces the User Prompt label on the template.
1. In the User Prompt box, click the Edit button. The Field Properties view appears.
2. Select a Field Properties option to format the User Prompt label on the template.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide 21 Customization
Design Fixed Prompt Fields

Fixed prompts give you the option to display a label without a text entry field.
1. In the Field Properties view, click Fixed Text.
2. In the Fixed Text box, type the text that replaces the User Prompt entry on the template, and then click the
Save button.
Figure 284. Field Properties Options
Design Text Entry Fields

You can add a label and a text box to the label template. Operator scan then use the fields to add text to the
label when it is printed.
1. In the Field Properties view, click Text.
Figure 285. Text Box Options
2. In the Prompt box, type the text that replaces the User Prompt entry on the template.
24814EN Rev E 267

3. Set the options.
Option What To Enter
Require Text Click the check box to require text entry during label printing. The text
box will be yellow. Remove the check mark if text entry is not required.
Clear previous text Click the check box if you want previous text to be cleared during label
when pausing for printing. Remove the check mark to create a tool tip that appears during
entry label printing. Type the tool tip in the Default text field box.
Pause for input Click Each Label to pause printing for text entry on each label.
Click Each Panel to pause printing for text entry on each panel.
Click Each Job to pause for text entry on each job during label printing.
Specify a List of Options

You can include a predefined list of options on the label or design your own list.
1. In the Field Properties view, click List. The List options appear.
Figure 286. List Options
3. Set the options.
Option What To Do
List box arrow Click to add a predefined list to the label.
New List button Click to create a new list. The system prompts you to name the new list.
Add button Click to add an item to the selected list.
Edit button Click to edit the items on the selected list.

Option What To Do
Save List As Click to save a list with a different name.
Delete button Click the down arrow to select a list and then click Delete.
Add a Date
1. In the Field Properties view, click Date. The Date options appear.
Figure 287. Date Options
3. Set the options.
Option What To Do
Date Click Current Date to include today’s date on the label.

Click Specify Date to enter a date during label printing.
Pause for input Click Each Label to pause printing for text entry on each label.
Click Each Panel to pause printing for text entry on each panel.
Click Each Job to pause for text entry on each job during label printing.
24814EN Rev E 269

Add a Number or Letter to Labels

Increment Numerically
You can apply a number to each label and automatically increment it.
1. In the Field Properties view, click Mask.
Figure 288. Number Options
2. Click the 1+ button.
Figure 289. Increment by Number
Option What To Do
Digits Select the number of digits to display.
Start at Choose the increment to begin with. For example, enter 2 if you want to
increment the number by 2 each time it is printed.
Increment Choose when the increment number is applied.

Option What To Do
Reset After an item is incremented, choose when it is reset.
3. When you are finished, click the Add button. The system displays your selections.
Figure 290. Increment Labels by Number
Increment Alphabetically
You can apply a letter to each label and automatically increment it.
Figure 291. Letter Options
24814EN Rev E 271

2. Click the Aa+ button. The Aa+ options appear.
Figure 292. Increment by Letter
Option What To Do
Start at Type the increment you want to begin with. For example, enter A if you
want to start with that letter.
Increment Choose when the increment takes place.
Reset After an item is incremented, choose when the printer is reset.
3. When you are finished, click the Add button. The system displays your selections.
Figure 293. Increment Labels by Letter

Customize a Date Format

You can create a European, military, or other date format on the label.
Figure 294. Text and Date Options
2. Use the Text and Date options to format a date.
Option What To Do
Text Click to insert a slash or hyphen between elements.
Year Click yyyy for a four-digit year. Click yy for a two-digit year.
Month Click mm for a two-digit month. Click mmm for a three-digit month.
Day Click dd for a two-digit day.
Set the Default Template

You can select a label template as the default template to be used when labels are printed.
3. In the Label Name list box, click the arrow and select the template you want to specify as the default.
4. Click the Default Template check box.
24814EN Rev E 273

Modify a Label Template

3. In the Label Name list box, click the arrow and select the template you want to save under a different name.
4. Click the Save As button. The system prompts you to name the template.
Delete a Label Template

3. In the Label Name list box, click the arrow and select the template you want to delete.
4. Click the Delete button. The system prompts you to verify you want to delete the template.

CHAPTER 22
Connectivity
This section provides an overview of available connectivity options and benefits.
LIS Connectivity
The interface between the laboratory information system (LIS) and the VENTANA staining instruments
supports automatic test ordering and automatic test status updates.
Central Management
The Ventana Lab Manager (VLM) links the VENTANA system and other vendor systems in the Anatomic
Pathology lab. The VLM facilitates communication between staining host computers and the staining and
imaging platforms. In addition, the VLM, in combination with the Ventana Interface Point (VIP), connects the
VENTANA system and the LIS.
Ventana customers with multiple staining instruments can manage reagents, protocols, and inventory and share
the information between computer hosts.
Reagents on one host may be used on another, simplifying reagent inventory management and expense. In
addition, protocols may be automatically shared across hosts to save staff time and reduce the potential for
errors.
Figure 295. Central Management Architecture
24814EN Rev E 275

22 Connectivity BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide

CHAPTER 23
Troubleshooting
Run Function Tests

Function tests are used to diagnose instrument performance problems. As a rule, you will only do these tests at
the direction of a Ventana technician. For more information about instrument maintenance and testing, see
Cleaning and Maintenance, page 241.
Go to the Function Test List

1. Click the instrument name in the Instrument Bar, and then click the Instrument Maintenance icon in
Instrument View.
2. At Instrument Maintenance, click Function Tests. The function test list appears.
Home and Jog the Nozzle Plate

The nozzle plate always starts from a home position. The system keeps track of nozzle plate positions based on
their positions relative to the home position, so the nozzle plate needs to align with the home position precisely.
Symptom: “Nozzle plate position incorrect during the run” error message.
Test What It Does What to Use It For
Home Nozzle Plate ULTRA Send nozzle plate to home Diagnose problems in homing
position. sensor and nozzle plate
assembly.
Jog Nozzle Plate CW ULTRA Advance nozzle plate one After homing, check nozzle
position at a time. plate alignment; detect worn
parts.
1. To home the nozzle plate, select TEST - HOME NOZZLE PLATE ULTRA, and then click the Run button.
2. To jog the nozzle plate, select TEST - JOG NOZZLE PLATE CW ULTRA, and then click the Run button. The
nozzle plate advances one position each time you click the Run button. You can jog it repeatedly to go
through all 30 nozzle plate positions. If a mechanical part is worn, the plate may not advance correctly each
time it is jogged.
24814EN Rev E 277

23 Troubleshooting BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Home and Jog the Reagent Carousel

The reagent carousel always starts from a home position. The system keeps track of reagent dispensers based
on their positions relative to the home position, so the carousel needs to align with the home position precisely.
Symptom: “Reagent tray position incorrect during the run” error message.
Test What It Does What to Use It For
Home Reagent Tray ULTRA Sends the reagent carousel Diagnose problems in the
to the home position. homing sensor and the
carousel drive assembly.
Jog Reagent Tray CW Advances the reagent After homing, check to see if
ULTRA carousel one position at a the carousel is positioning the
time. reagent dispensers correctly.
1. To home the reagent carousel, select TEST - HOME REAGENT TRAY ULTRA and click the Run button. To repeat
the test, press the Run button again.
2. To jog the reagent carousel, select TEST - JOG REAGENT TRAY CW ULTRA and click the Run button. To repeat
the test, press the Run button again. The carousel advances one position each time you click the button.
You can jog repeatedly to go through all 30 dispense positions. If a mechanical part is worn, the plate may
not advance correctly each time it is jogged.

APPENDIX A
Ventana Laboratory Manager
About the Ventana Laboratory Manager

The Ventana Lab Manager (VLM) facilitates communication between host computers and the staining and
imaging platforms in the Anatomic Pathology laboratory. When configured with the Ventana Interface Point
(VIP), VLM connects the VENTANA system to a Laboratory Information System (LIS).
To set up communication between the host computers in the laboratory, set the VLM options in the Ventana
System Software (see Specify VLM Options, page 230).
Set Up VLM
1. Double-click the VLM shortcut icon. The VLM view opens.
.
2. Click the Settings tab and enter the settings.

Figure 296. VLM Icon
Figure 297. VLM Settings
24814EN Rev E 279

Appendix A Ventana Laboratory Manager BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Option What To Do
Operational Role Select Master if this is the computer that communicates with other host
buttons computers on the network. Select Simulcaster if this is the computer that
receives data from the host computers on the network.
Unique Lab On the VLM tab, type the Lab Manager Name set in the Setup Host
Manager Name options.
Enable VIP Client Select this option to allow communication with the VIP software so that
Connections the host computer can receive data from an LIS.
Enable VISTA Select this option to allow communication with the VISTA software so
Client Connections that the host computer can receive data from VIAS.
Automatically Select this option to automatically start the VLM application when the
Launch computer starts up.
Enable Sub- Select this option to exchange data with other computers.
network
Simulcasting
Services
Computer Names Type the name of the computer you want to exchange data with.
Computer Name Enter the computer’s IP address to exchange data with that computer.
3. When your entries are complete, click the Apply button to save them.
Monitor Connections
Open VLM and click the Connections tab. A list appears showing the computers connected, connection type,
and data packets received and sent.
Monitor Data Elements

Open VLM and click the Data Elements tab. A list appears showing the data types (protocols, case slides,
reagents, profiles) being exchanged and the status of each data connection.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide Appendix A Ventana Laboratory Manager
View VLM Events

The event log records the data packets exchanged between the host computer and the computers connected to it
through the VLM. It shows the date and time when data was exchanged, the computer that sent the data, and
the staining instrument the computer was connected to.
1. Click the Event Log tab to open the log.
Figure 298. Monitor VLM Events
24814EN Rev E 281

Appendix A Ventana Laboratory Manager BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
2. Set the following options to view and capture data.
Option What To Do
Capture Click the check box to capture current events and display them. Clear
the check box if you do not want to capture current events.
Auto Scroll Click the check box to turn automatic scrolling to the current event on or
off.
Clear Display Click this button to clear all the events from the display.
button
Apply Filter button Click this button to apply the current selections of event types and event
sources to the current display.
Load Log button Click this button to load a log file stored on a disk into the event grid.
Clear Log button Click this button to clear the on-disk event log of all events.
Event Types Filter Use with the Apply Filter button to set up the filter criteria to display
specific event types (exchange between the computer and any
connected computer).
Event Sources Use with the Apply Filter button to set up the filter criteria to display
Filter specific event sources (computers that generated data exchange).

APPENDIX B
Ventana Interface Point
About the Ventana Interface Point Software

Ventana Interface Point (VIP) is used to test HL7 codes that are used between a Laboratory Information
System (LIS) and multiple host computers controlling VENTANA staining instruments. VIP provides the
ability to test an implementation of the Ventana HL7 specification in a simulated environment, without being
connected to a staining instrument. It emulates the LIS connection, incorporating complete test ordering, status
updating, and master file synchronization. Developers can use VIP to test HL7 codes during development of
the interface to facilitate and reduce rework.
Set Up Interface Options

1. Double-click the VIP shortcut icon. The VIP options
appear.
2. Click Settings.
Figure 299. VIP Icon
Figure 300. VIP HL7 Interface
3. Set the options for the interface.
24814EN Rev E 283

Appendix B Ventana Interface Point BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide
Option What To Do
Facility Name Type the name of the laboratory or facility using VIP.
Receiving Type the name of the LIS application.

Application (MSH.5)
Receiving Facility Type the name of the laboratory receiving information from an LIS.
(MSH.6)
Validate OBR.4 Check this box to validate the value received in OBR.4 of each order
value with current against the list of protocols replicating in the VLM. If the Universal
Protocols Service Identifier specified in OBR.4 does not match a defined protocol,
the LIS order is rejected.
Abbreviated ORR & Check this box to receive a simple acknowledgment of an order rather
ORL than a complete echo of the original order.
Acknowledgments
OBX segment Date Check this box to display observation dates in plain text.
values as text
Load Connections Check this box to load previously established connections when the VIP
on Startup is started up.
Automatically Check this box to launch the VIP automatically when Windows is started.
Launch
Lab Manager Name Type the name found in the Lab Manager Name field of the VLM Options
tab in Setup Host.
4. In the Keycode Range list box, click the arrow and select the keycode range used for orders placed via the
LIS connection, and then click the Commit button.
5. When you are finished, click the Apply button.

BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System Operator Guide Appendix B Ventana Interface Point
Map Fields
You can use the Field Mapper to create an HL7 script. The script maps codes in the HL7 Message tab to any
field in the right pane, such as Template, Patient ID, Patient Name, and so on. The Field Mapper transforms
data from HL7 messages into a format that the VLM can understand.
Figure 301. VIP HL7 Message Format
24814EN Rev E 285

Field Mapper Buttons

You can use the buttons above the Field Mapper to edit HL7 scripts.
Figure 302. VIP Field Mapper Buttons
Button Description
1 Execute the field mapping script and translate the currently loaded HL7 message to
a case result test.
2 Refresh the HL7 message with the latest.
3 Reload field mapping from disk.
4 Save the Field Mapper to disk and go Live.
5 Create a new Field Mapper line.
6 Edit the selected Field Mapper line.
7 Delete the selected Field Mapper line.
8 Move the selected Field Mapper line up one line.
9 Move the selected Field Mapper line down one line.
10 Show Field Mapper errors.
11 Export HL7 messages to an internal or external drive.
12 Import HL7 messages from an internal or external drive.

Example: Map HL7 Code to Patient ID Field

1. In the field list on the right, double-click Patient ID. The HL7 script appears and lists the selected field, the
function to be performed, and the corresponding HL7 code.
Figure 303. Map HL7 Code to a Field
2. Click the Patient ID Field. The field options appear.
Figure 304. Field Options
Option What To Do
Select Data Type Choose Variable to store the value to a temporary variable to be further
processed by another command line.
Choose Ventana Data to store the mapped field’s value to one of the
slide data types.
Select Ventana Click the list box arrow and select a slide data field.
Data Field
24814EN Rev E 287

3. Click Copy. The function options appear.
Figure 305. Function Options
Option What To Do
Select Function Choose Concat to combine up to four values from an HL7 field variable
or literal.
Choose Copy to copy a value from one HL7 field or variable to another.
Choose Extract to extract a sub-string from an HL7 field or variable by a
literal delimiter.
Choose Left to extract the left sub-string from a field or variable.
Choose Mid to extract the middle sub-string from a field or variable.
Choose Right to extract the right sub-string from a field or variable.
4. Click [PID.2]. The HL7 options appear.
Figure 306. HL7 Code Options
Option What To Do
Select Data Type Choose HL7 Field as the source for the data.
Select HL7 Field Click the list box arrow and select an HL7 field.
Enter New HL7 Type a new field name.

Field Name
NOTE: If you select Variable from the Select Data Type list box, the Select HL7 menu will change to
Select Variable, and the Enter New HL7 Field Name field will change to Enter New Variable.
5. When you are finished, click the Apply button.

View Case Result

You can run an HL7 script and see the data displayed in the Case Result tab.
1. Click the Case Result tab.
2. In the right pane, choose the field and interface you want to run.
3. Click the lightning bolt button to execute the HL7 script and display it
Figure 307. VIP Case Result Tab
View Protocols
You can see all the protocols currently defined and used on the staining instrument.
1. Click Protocols to see the defined protocols.
2. Protocol information appears, including the number, name, and the date it was modified.
3. Click the Refresh button to update the protocol list.
View Case Slides

You can view active cases, for example, labels that need to be printed, stained or processed in a stainer, or are
in the staining process in the VLM, orders placed through the HL7 interface, and slides printed from the host
PCs.
1. Click Case Slides.
2. Case slide information appears, such as keycode, protocol number and name, patient ID and name, and
institution name.
3. Click the Refresh button to update the case slides list.
24814EN Rev E 289

Create a New Connection To a Client or Server.

Open the Connection Options
Do either of the following:
• Double-click Make New Connection to add a new connection and display the Connection options.
• Right-click the Make New Connection option to display the New Connection button.
Figure 309. New LIS Connection
Figure 308. LIS Connections
Add a Client Connection

If you need to receive orders from more than one LIS, you can create more than one connection. Each
connection will require the correct Server IP Address.
1. Open the new connection options.
2. Set the client connection options.
Figure 310. New Client Connection

Option What To Do
1 Click Client. This means the VIP will be acting as a TCP/IP socket client, while the
LIS will be acting as the TCP/IP socket server.
2 Type the IP address of the LIS.
3 Type the VIP port number.
4 Check the types of outbound messages that are to be transmitted.
3. Click the Connect button. When the VIP and the LIS are connected, the button will change from Connect
to Disconnect. Click Disconnect to break the connection between the VIP and the LIS.
The prompts below the Connect button allow you to monitor communication between the HL7 and LIS.
• Messages Received—the total count of HL7 messages received by this connection.
• Messages Sent—the total number of HL7 messages sent by this connection.
• Queued Messages—in the event of communication latency issues, out-bound messages are queued to
disk, this shows the total number of LIS bound messages that are currently queued to disk.
• Average Response—the average number of milliseconds it took VIP to receive and acknowledge an
in-bound HL7 message.
• Acknowledgement—the average number of milliseconds it took the LIS to receive and acknowledge
an out-bound HL7 message.
24814EN Rev E 291

Add a New Server Connection

1. Open the new connection options.
2. Set the server connection options.
Figure 311. New Server Connection
Option What To Do
1 Click Server. This means the LIS acts as a TCP/IP client.
2 Shows the default IP address for the LIS.
3 Type the LIS port number.
4 Check the types of outbound messages that are to be transmitted.
3. Click the Connect button to open an HL7 connection that will be available for a client connection. The
Listening button displays until the connection is established. Once the connection is available, the button
will change from Connect to Disconnect. Click Disconnect to break the connection.
The prompts below the Connect button allow you to monitor communication between the VIP and LIS.
• Messages Received—the total count of HL7 messages received by this connection.
• Messages Sent—the total number of HL7 messages sent by this connection.
• Queued Messages—in the event of communication latency issues, out-bound messages are queued to
disk, this shows the total number of LIS bound messages that are currently queued to disk.
• Average Response—the average number of milliseconds it took VIP to receive and acknowledge an
in-bound HL7 message.
• Acknowledgement—the average number of milliseconds it took the LIS to receive and acknowledge
an out-bound HL7 message.

View Data Elements

You can view the data being managed by a host. A data element is a category of information that is managed
by a host PC, for example, all the NexES defined protocols comprise a single data element.
1. Click Data Elements.
Figure 312. Data Elements
2. The data being processed by the host appears, including the data type (configurations, protocols, case
slides), the state (if the host is idle or transmitting data), total number of data type, and version.
View the Event Log

You can use the Event Log to see events and interactions between the VIP and the VLM, and between the VIP
and the HL7 connections.
1. Click Event Log.
Figure 313. Message Transaction Event Log
2. The following event information appears.
24814EN Rev E 293

Option What To Do
Date/Time See the date and time that the event took place.
Fast Time (ms) View a very accurate millisecond timer used for communications packets
versions.
Source View the source of the event, for example VLM, a host PC, or internal
source.
Connection View the staining instrument to which the source was connected.
Event Type See the type of event that occurred.
Capture check box Click to capture current events to the display.
Auto Scroll check Click to turn on or off automatic scrolling to the current event.
box
3. Do any of the following:

• Click the Clear Display button to remove all the events from the display.
• Click the Apply Filter button to apply the current selections of event types and event sources to the
current display. Click the Event Types Filter check box button to set up the filter criteria at which
events tie to display. Click the Event Sources Filter check box to set up the filter criteria at which event
sources to display.
• Click the Load Log Files button to load the log file from an internal or external drive into the event
grid.
• Click the Clear Log Files button to clear the on-disk event log.

BenchMark Ultra Advanced Staining Operator Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BenchMark Ultra Advanced Staining Operator Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BenchMark ULTRA

Advanced Staining System

Ventana Medical Systems, Inc.

Part No.: 750-600

All rights reserved.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Regulatory Notices, removed reference to clinical or research in Intended Purpose section.

Ventana Medical Systems, Inc.

Roche Diagnostics GmbH

ii BenchMark ULTRA Advanced Staining System

List of Figures ........................................................................................... xvii

Chapter 1. Welcome .......................................................................................1

Chapter 2. Warnings and Precautions ............................................................5

24814EN Rev E iii

Electrical Hazards .................................................................................................. 6

Chapter 3. The BenchMark ULTRA System .............................................. 11

Chapter 4. Perform a Staining Run .............................................................. 21

iv Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Load Slides ............................................................................................................... 25

Chapter 5. Start and Stop the System ...........................................................27

Chapter 6. Operate the Staining Instrument .................................................31

Reagent Access and Reagent Qualification ......................................................... 40

Chapter 7. Manage Slide Orders ................................................................. 47

vi Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Delete an Order ......................................................................................................... 58

Chapter 8. Create Staining Protocols ...........................................................61

Chapter 9. Generate Slide Labels .................................................................73

Chapter 10. Work with Slides ......................................................................81

24814EN Rev E vii

Cancel a Slide ...................................................................................................... 82

Chapter 11. Manage Reagents ..................................................................... 93

viii Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Chapter 12. Titrating ..................................................................................105

Chapter 13. Prepare Bulk Products ............................................................111

Chapter 14. Quality Control .......................................................................117

Chapter 15. Reports ................................................................................... 127

Chapter 16. Label Printer .......................................................................... 141

x Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Chapter 17. Messages and Errors ...............................................................145

Chapter 18. Manage Inventory ...................................................................197

Sort Using Column Headings ........................................................................ 203

Chapter 19. Set Up the System .................................................................. 225

xii Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Update SLS for a New Label Roll or Ribbon ........................................................... 233

Chapter 20. Cleaning and Maintenance .....................................................241

24814EN Rev E xiii

Quarterly Maintenance ............................................................................................ 249

Chapter 21. Customization ........................................................................ 265

Chapter 22. Connectivity ........................................................................... 275

xiv Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Chapter 23. Troubleshooting ......................................................................277

Chapter A. Ventana Laboratory Manager ..................................................279

Chapter B. Ventana Interface Point ............................................................283

xvi Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

24814EN Rev E xvii

Figure 34. Software at Startup .........................................................................................28

xviii Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Figure 76. Protocol Keyword Find Feature ................................................................... 66

24814EN Rev E xix

xx Ventana Medical Systems A Member of the Roche Group

Figure 160. Detail Usage Report for Vials ................................................................... 130

24814EN Rev E xxi

Figure 203. Inventory Flag ............................................................................................205